Home

NUMMER 29 • NAJAAR 2003

1. 69 documentclass a4paper article 70 usepackage times 71 usepackage dutch babel 72 usepackage latin1 inputenc 73 usepackage graphicx 74 usepackage labels 75 76 Settings for the label package 8 105x74 stickers on an 77 AA page 78 LabelCols 2 79 LabelRows 4 80 LeftBorder Omm 81 RightBorder 0mm 82 TopBorder 1mm Najaar 2003 toepassing 47 toepassing Roland Smith 83 BottomBorder Omm 84 numberoflabels 8 85 De inhoud van het genericlabel commando is de werkelijke definitie van de inhoud van de sticker De maten die gebruikt zijn om de verschillende elementen van de picture omgeving te plaatsen zijn proefondervindelijk bepaald De macro s die boven gedefinieerd zijn worden hier gebruikt Dit deel van het bestand hoeft dan ook zelden aangepast te worden om een ander label te maken Al komt het voor dat op regel 86 huge vervangen moet worden door Large indien de handelsnaam van de stof erg lang is 86 begin document 87 genericlabel raisebox 35mm setlength unitlength 1mm renewcommand sfdefault phv sffamily begin picture 104 74 put 5 40 makebox 29 29 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 includegraphics width 29mm UpperSymbol put 5 36 5 makebox 29 5 textbf textsc scriptsize UpperText put 5 8 ma
2. DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj m n lt gt ssub pmnx m n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj m sc lt gt ssub pmnx m n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj m sl lt gt ssub pmnx m s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj m it lt gt ssub pmnx m it DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj sb n lt gt ssub pmnx sb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj sb sc lt gt ssub pmnx sb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj sb s1 lt gt ssub pmnx sb s1 DeclareFontShape TS fe etree lt gt ssub pmnx sb it DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj b n lt gt ssub pmnx b n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj b sc lt gt ssub pmnx b n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj b sl lt gt ssub pmnx b s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj b it lt gt ssub pmnx b it DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj eb n lt gt ssub pmnx eb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj eb sc lt gt ssub pmnx eb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj eb sl lt gt ssub pmnx eb s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj eb it lt gt ssub pmnx eb it DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj bx n lt gt ssub pmnx sb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj bx sc lt gt ssub pmnx sb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj bx sl lt gt ssub pmnx sb s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnj bx it lt gt ssub pmnx sb it endinput For the pmnw family ProvidesFile ts1pmnw fd DeclareFontFamily TS1 pmnw DeclareF
3. installfonts instal fami ly T1 pmnx instal fami ly TS1 pmnx instal font pmnr9e pmnr8r pmnr8x latin t1 T1 pmnx m n instal font pmnri9e pmnri8r pmnri8x latin t1 71 pmnx m it The setup of the upright and italic shapes does not differ from tutorial v instal font pmnrc9e kernoff pmnr8r pmnr8x kernon glyphoff pmnrc8r glyphon resetsc latinsc tlc T1 pmnx m sc installfont pmnric9e kernoff pmnri8r pmnri8x kernon glyphoff pmnric8r glyphon resetsc latinsc tlc T1 pmnx m si There is one problem with taking optical small caps from an expert font as demonstrated in tutorial v there are no kerning pairs between the uppercase alphabet and the small caps replacing the lowercase letters Without dedicated small caps fonts there is nothing we can do about that Now that we have both expert and small caps fonts however we could take an approach similar to the one outlined in tutorial rr adding the expert font on top of them to get the additional ligatures We will use a different technique though which extracts the more comprehensive kerning data from the small caps fonts while taking 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 THE FONTINST FILE 69 the glyphs from the base and the expert fonts only Apart from being conceptu ally cleaner this approach has the additional benefit of
4. 48 item R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond 49 en aanraking met de huid 50 item R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met 51 de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten 52 niet uitgesloten 53 item S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren 54 item S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen 55 niet roken 56 item S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en 57 beschermende kleding 58 item S45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel 59 voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk 60 hem dit etiket tonen 61 62 Tenslotte wordt nog naam en adres van de leverancier toegevoegd en de datum waarop het bestand gecompileerd is 63 The name address and phone number of the supplier should 64 go here 65 newcommand Firma Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM 66 Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 67 newcommand filedate number year number month number day Deze macro s bevatten alle variabele informatie van een label Nu volgt de algemene code Uitgegaan wordt van de standaard article class met het labels package Indien men labels in een andere taal wil maken moet men natuurlijk een ander argument aan het babel package meegeven Omdat ik meestal ppF bestanden maak van dergelijke labels heb ik het times package gebruikt om ervoor te zorgen dat er postscript fonts gebruikt worden 68 Normally no changes required below here
5. 63 v 5 The style file 64 v 6 Using the fonts 65 EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP 4 v1 1 The fontinst file 67 v1 2 Text ornaments 74 v1 3 The map file 74 v1 4 Extending the user interface 75 v1 5 A high level interface for ornaments 78 v1 6 The style file 79 CODE TABLES rora an are Ba Sok Be Aas BR Ge Paes Ae Bae ELS THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE 4 REVISION HISTORY 1 eee eee eee eee eee eee INTRODUCTION This guide to setting up Postscript Type1 fonts for use with Tex and Latex is not systematic but task oriented It will discuss the most common scenarios you are likely to encounter when installing Postscript fonts The individual tu torials collected here are not self contained though the second tutorial will presuppose that you have read the first one and so on All the tools employed in the installation process are documented well the actual difficulty most users are facing when trying to install new fonts is understanding how to put all the pieces together This applies to fontinst the Tex font installation tool in partic ular Controlled by Tex commands fontinst is a powerful and extremely flexible tool While its manual documents all available commands individually you will most likely wonder how to actually employ them after reading the manual This is what this guide is about Because of its concept you will need the following add
6. b H H 1 th instal font mjnbo09e mjnbo8r mjnbo8x latin t10 T1 mjn0 install font mjnbi09e mjnbi8r mjnbi8x latin t10 T1 mjn0 1 tht i s i H H n b b 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP endinstall fonts Our fontinst file will omit the small caps shape to save some disk space We have included a global shape substitution for the sc shape in the header so mjn0 sc will be substituted by mjn0 n via a silent substitution in the font definition file Since the figures of upright and small caps shapes do not differ at all and since we need the mjn0 family for figures only we can safely omit the small caps shape For the mjn1 family we adapt the names of the virtual fonts adding the Fontname code 1 to indicate superior figures the encoding vector t11 etx and the Nrss declaration in a similar way install fonts install family T1 mjn1 installfont mjnr19e mjnr8r mjnr8x latin t11 T1 mjn1 m n installfont mjnrol9e mjnro8r mjnro8x latin t11 T1 mjn1 m s1 installfont mjnri19e mjnri8r mjnri8x latin t11 T1 mjn1 m it install font mjnb19e mjnb8r mjnb8x latin t11 T1 mjn1 b n instal font mjnbol9e mjnbo8r mjnbo8x latin t11 T1 mjn1 b s1 install font mjnbi19e mjnbi8r mjnbi8x latin t11 T1 mjn1 b it endinstallfonts bye This
7. b it lt gt zpeubit DeclareFontShape U peut bx n lt gt ssub peut b n DeclareFontShape U peut bx sc lt gt ssub peut b n DeclareFontShape U peut bx s1 lt gt ssub peut b s1 DeclareFontShape U peut bx it lt gt ssub peut b it endinput We install the map file peu map as well as all afm tfm pfb and fd files in the local Tex tree as explained in the first tutorial and add peu map to the con figuration files for pdftex dvips and xdvi Finally we run texhash The euro symbol can now be used in virtual fonts Since we have font definition files for Latex as well we could also access it in any Latex file with a construct like this one fontencoding U fontfamily peu selectfont char 128 So let s make that a generic euro package peufonts sty for use with all fonts that do not provide a native euro symbol NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage peufonts 2002 10 25 v1 0 Adobe Euro Fonts RequirePackage textcomp DeclareRobustCommand eurrm OV 0 N A U 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 52 THE EURO CURRENCY SYMBOL fontencoding U font fami ly DeclareRobustCommand eursf peu selectfont char 128 fontencoding U fontfamily peus selectfont char 128 p 9 DeclareRobustCommand eurtt fontencoding U fontfamily eut selectfont char 128 We define three commands eurrm eursf and eurtt which typeset a
8. eng These warnings are normal the missing glyphs are simply not provided by most Postscript fonts In addition to that you will most likely be lacking the ligatures ff ffi and fff This means that they will not be typeset as a single glyph but as a sequence of characters There is no warning message in this case as fontinst will construct the ligatures using the single letter glyphs at hand You will usu ally find these ligatures in so called expert fonts which complement the base fonts Some foundries however like FontFont include them in the base fonts Standard Postscript fonts should always provide the ligatures f and fl The situation is worse for Ts1 encoding since parts of it are rather exotic defin ing glyphs not found in industry standard fonts such as a copyleft symbol or glyphs which should rather go in a dedicated symbol font such as arrow sym bols usr share texmf tex fontinst base tsl etx Warning missing glyph arrowleft Warning missing glyph arrowright Warning missing glyph tieaccentlowercase Warning missing glyph tieaccentcapital Warning missing glyph newtieaccentlowercase Warning missing glyph newtieaccentcapital Warning missing glyph blank Warning missing glyph hyphendb1 Warning missing glyph zerooldstyle Warning missing glyph oneoldstyle Warning missing glyph twooldstyle Warning missing glyph threeoldstyle Warning missing glyph fouro
9. gt ssub pmnx sb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 bx sc lt gt ssub pmnx sb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 bx sl lt gt ssub pmnx sb s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 bx it lt gt ssub pmnx sb it endinput v1 2 Text ornaments The Minion expert package includes a dedicated ornament font pmnrp pfb As discussed before in section rv 3 we do not really need fontinst when installing symbol fonts Since no reencoding is required and there are no virtual fonts afm2tfm is sufficient for the job afm2tfm pmnrp afm pmnrp tfm Using the fonts with Latex requires a font definition file though Symbol fonts are not based on any particular encoding so we use the encoding code U un coded unknown in this case This is upmnp fd ProvidesFile upmnp fd DeclareFontFamily U pmnp DeclareFontShape U pmnp m n lt gt pmnrp endinput v1 3 The map file The map file for Minion is longer than the one in the last tutorial but concep tually similar Note that the sc osF fonts are not required They are included here for reference only The swash and ornament fonts were not reencoded hence their mapping is similar to that of expert fonts pmnr8r Minion Regular TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnr8a pfb pmnri8r Minion Italic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnri8a pfb pmns8r Minion Semibold TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc l
10. install fonts instal family T1 pmnw instal font pmnriw9d pmnri8r unsetcaps pmnriw7a pmnri8x latin t1j T1 pmnw m it instal1 font pmnsiw9d pmnsi8r unsetcaps pmnsiw7a pmnsi8x latin t1j T1 pmnw sb it 93 94 THE FONTINST FILE 71 endinstall fonts bye In order to incorporate the italic swashes we create an additional font family called pmnw We read the respective base font and clear the slots of the capi tal letters using the metric file unsetcaps mtx After that we add the respec tive swash font and finally the expert font as usual We employ t1j etx to get hanging figures by default Our self made metric file unsetcaps mtx uses the unsetglyph command as follows relax metrics unsetglyph A unsetglyph B unsetglyph C unsetglyphii unsetglyph Y unsetglyph Z endmetrics We are merely clearing the slots of captial letters found in the English here Capital letters with an accent are not removed because the Minion swash set does not provide accented swash capitals anyway This means that all accented capital letters will be taken from the ordinary italic font In this particular case oT1 encoding could be used as a workaround since this encoding constructs accented letters from the English alphabet as discussed in tutorial 1 So here is the respective part of the file for or1 encoding install fonts instal family 0T1 pmnw instal font pmnriw90 pmnri
11. si lt gt ssub pmnj sb si DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw b n lt gt ssub pmnj b n DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw b sc lt gt ssub pmnj b sc DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw b sl lt gt ssub pmnj b it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw b it lt gt ssub pmnj b it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw b si lt gt ssub pmnj b si DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw eb n lt gt ssub pmnj eb n DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw eb sc lt gt ssub pmnj eb sc DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw eb s1 lt gt ssub pmnj eb it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw eb it lt gt ssub pmnj eb it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw eb si lt gt ssub pmnj eb si DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw bx n lt gt ssub pmnw sb n DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw bx sc lt gt ssub pmnw sb sc DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw bx sl lt gt ssub pmnw sb it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw bx it lt gt ssub pmnw sb it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw bx si lt gt ssub pmnw sb si endinput Only the pmnx family offers rs1 encoded fonts as the glyphs found in this en coding are identical across all font families To make sure that all font families work as expected however we need font definition files containing family sub stitutions which cannot be defined in a fontinst file For the pmnj family ProvidesFile tslpmnj fd DeclareFontFamily TS1 pmnj
12. 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 INFERIOR AND SUPERIOR FIGURES 59 coding positions for figures We have to keep in mind that the regular encoding vector for T1 encoding t1 etx references the figures as zero one two while the hanging old style figures in the expert font which we want to be available by default are labeled zerooldstyle oneoldstyle and so on In or der to arrange the glyphs according to our wishes we could read the regular font clear the figures read the expert font and rename the old style figures In this case however there is a simpler way we use the special encoding vector t1j etx which is essentially equivalent to t1 etx but automatically appends the suffix oldstyle to all figures installfont mjnrc9d mjnr8r mjnr8x latinsc t1cj T1 mjnj m sc We have regular optical small caps so we use the metric file latinsc mtx here Instead of t1c etx we use the encoding file t1cj etx to make hanging figures the default The remaining virtual fonts are built like the upright shape 34 sl H installfont installfont installfont installfont mjnro9d mjnro8r mjnro8x latin t1j T1 mjnj mjnri9d mjnri8r mjnri8x latin t1j T1 mjnj mjnb9d mjnb8r mjnb8x latin t1j T1 mjnj b mjnbc9d mjnb8r mjnb8x latin t1lcj T1 mjnj m m i n b s it H n b sc There are no optical small caps in the bold weight exper
13. For large text font families most font vendors do not put all fonts in a sin gle package They usually offer a base package containing upright and italic oblique fonts plus an advanced package complementing the former The ad vanced package will usually contain one of the following additional font sets a set of optical small caps and hanging figures a set of expert fonts gt additional weights or a combination of these sets This package has to be purchased sep 1 Optical or real small caps as opposed to mechanical or faked ones are special glyphs found in a dedicated small caps font They are preferable to mechanical small caps since they were actually drawn by the font designer Mechanical small caps are generated by taking the tall caps of the font and scaling them down 2 While hanging or old style figures have ascenders and descenders to blend in with lowercase and mixed case text lining figures are aligned with the height of the capital letters compare 1369 to 1369 Hanging figures are designed for use within mixed case text whereas lining figures are suitable for all uppercase text only The latter also work well for applications like numbered lists and since they are usually monospaced for tabular settings 3 Expert fonts are complements to be used in conjunction with regular text fonts They usu ally contain optical small caps additional sets of figures ligatures as well as some other sym
14. The raw Tex Base 1 encoded fonts are now prepared for the generation of virtual fonts install fonts installfamily T1 psb instal family TS1 psb The installation of a font family is enclosed in an environment which we open in line 12 and close later in line 29 First of all the font family we are about to install has to be declared we have Adobe Sabon and we are going to install it in T1 encoding Fontname code 8t as well as in Ts1 8c The third argument to installfamily corresponds to the second one of the latinfamily com mand it is used to include code in the font definition file that will be read by Latex whenever the font is selected T1 will serve as our base encoding in Latex s text mode later It is complemented by rs which provides additional glyphs such as currency signs and other frequently used symbols The latinfamily command also provides or1 7t and Tex Base 1 encoded fonts We will omit both encodings here as we do not need them While raw Tex Base 1 encoded fonts 8r form the basis of all virtual fonts they are usually not deployed as such on the Tex level and the or1 encoding is not suitable for Postscript fonts anyway We will therefore deliberately ignore it and focus on T1 and Ts1 exclu sively installfont psbr8t psbr8r latin t1 T1 psb m n 1 I suggest you do not bother trying to match the slope of the italic fonts when creating a slanted variant of a roman font This will us
15. W die erg uitste ken Op het moment van schrijven maken vier stukken geen gebruik van protrude factors Kijk maar eens of je die eruit kunt halen 1 Han Th Than Micro typographic extensions to the TEX typeset ting system Masaryk University Brno 2000 2 Hans Hagen Hanging punctuation a pdf IEX microtypographic ex tension Maps 25 najaar 2000 MAPS fonts Installing fonts in LaTeX a user s experience Ferdy Hanssen abstract This paper presents a user s experience with installing fonts for use in LaTeX It will be shown that it is not hard to make a standard Type 1 font work if you use modern font installation software for LalTgX All the steps necessary to install the example fonts will be shown The example fonts used are Adobe Garamond from Adobe and Mrs Eaves from Emigre keywords fonts LaTeX user Introduction Installing fonts in LaTgX has the name of being a very hard task to accomplish But it is nothing more than following instructions However the problem is that first the proper instructions have to be found and second the instructions then have to be read and understood We will show that it is not hard by sharing with you our experience with installing two commercially available font families that work out of the box on most computer systems We will only deal with fonts in the so called Type 1 or Postscript format Truetype fonts are not within the scope of this paper Also so ca
16. With this in mind lets add a section for Ts1 encoding to our fontinst file 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 THE FONTINST FILE 37 installfont psbr8c psbr8r unsetnum kernoff psbrc8r kernon resetosf textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m n For the upright fonts the hanging figures are in fact in the small caps font which complicates the installation even more But we have dealt with this problem be fore and the first steps should therefore look familiar we read psbr8r clear the standard figures using unsetnum and read psbrc8r Since we are dealing with TS1 here one additional step is required We add resetosf mtx to the input file list of this installfont command to rename the figures found in psbrc8r the figures in psbr8r have already been discarded by unsetnum resetosf will rename the figures to zerooldstyle and so on We also add kernon mtx and kernoff mtx to protect the kerning data Typing textthreeoldstyle in a Latex file when the textcomp package has been loaded would now typeset a proper hanging three instal font psbro8c psbro8r unsetnum kernoff psbrco8r kernon resetosf textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m s1 The slanted shape is handled in a similar way because it relies on the figures in the small caps font as well For the remaining virtual fonts the installation is simpler Since the osr fonts already provide hanging figures all we need to do is rename them for Ts1 encoding b
17. lt 8r enc lt psbri8a pfb psbb8r Sabon Bold TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb psbbi8r Sabon BoldItalic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbi8a pfb psbro8r Sabon Roman 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb psbbo8r Sabon Bold 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb Note that the T1 and Ts1 encodings are used for the virtual fonts only they are what Tex will work with A Postscript file created by dvips however does not contain any virtual fonts They will have been resolved into the raw fonts they are based on by dvips The raw fonts used to build virtual ones were reencoded to Tex Base 1 encoding during the installation But this reencoding step affects the font metrics only while the pfb files embedded in the Postscript code still MAP FILES REVISITED 31 use Adobe Standard as their native encoding Therefore every application read ing the final file has to repeat the reencoding step for the font outlines before rendering the fonts This is what the ReEncodeFont instruction is all about Since we cannot expect every application to know about Tex Base 1 encoding we embed the respective encoding vector 8r enc along with the fonts Com pare the first transformfont command in the fontinst file to the first line of the map file transformfont psbr8r reencodefont 8r fromafm psbr8a psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding R
18. o entry elements first check whether they are in a thead or tfoot if so they apply the saved colspec attributes Then they apply their own attributes This order is important ConTpXt gives precedence to properties set up per cell over properties set up for the whole table or per row or column But in this case we apply what was originally a column specification per cell so we must take care of the prece dence ourselves Revision history The revision history contains a number of revisions Each revision specifies one or more fields out of five possible fields I wanted to represent this in a table which should only MAPS Docbook In ConTgxt contain those columns for which at least one revision specifies data Programming this was my first challenge in this project Hans Hagen suggested the solution The revision history is saved and then processed twice For the first pass of the saved revision history we define the revision fields such that they register themselves when they occur but suppress all output We also count the number of revisions so that we will know which row must contain the bottom rule of the table Now we know which fields occur and we can setup the table and output its header row For the second pass we define the revision element such that it outputs the row with the fields So that the fields are output in the same order as in the header row regardless of their order in the XML document we first save the fields i
19. 19 If loading 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 USING THE FONTS 65 the alternative family fails as well we finally print a warning message 12 14 If the optional argument is not used the second step will be omitted def exfs get base 1 2 3 4 nil 1 2 3 DeclareRobustCommand Instyle not math al phabet Instyle relax exfs try fami ly expandafter exfs get base fefamily nil expandafter exfs get base f family nil x After that the lnstyle macro needs to be adjusted in order to exploit the op tional argument It will try the expert family with a four character code first 30 and make exfs try family fall back to the basic font family with a three character code 29 if the former is not available DeclareRobustCommand osstyle not math al phabet osstyle relax exfs try family expandafter exfs get base f family nil j The availability of hanging figures is expressed by appending the letter j to the font family code for both basic and expert font sets so osstyle does not need any modification DeclareRobustCommand instyle not math al phabet instyle relax exfs try fami ly expandafter exfs get base f family nil 0 DeclareRobustCommand sustyle not math al phabet sustyle relax exfs try fami ly expandafter exfs get base f family nil 1 With inferior and superior figures implemented as two additional font families mjn0 and mjni we add
20. 2 with no invariant sections no front cover texts and no back cover texts A copy of the license is included in the appendix This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but without any warranty without even the implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose CONTENTS INTRODUCTION cee 5 5 uwe a oet en oen oe Red ca ar Re Sa oan oen Arcen Gh ae ese ee ade I II III IV VI THE BASICS os ao ee A OS He ed de a a B 1 1 Renaming the files 9 1 2 Using fontinst 11 1 3 Installing the files 14 1 4 Creating map files 16 1 5 Using the fonts 19 1 6 Computer Modern and T1 encoding 21 STANDARD FONT SETS eee eee eee eee eee 11 1 The fontinst file 25 11 2 The latinfamily macro revisited 29 11 3 Map files revisited 30 OPTICAL SMALL CAPS AND HANGING FIGURES 111 1 The fontinst file 35 111 2 The map file 39 111 3 The style file 40 111 4 Fonts supplied with Tex 41 THE EURO CURRENCY SYMBOL 2 2 2 ee eee eee Iv 1 Uncoded euro symbol 43 1v 2 Euro symbol encoded as currency symbol 46 1v 3 Euro symbol taken from external symbol font 47 1v 4 Euro symbol taken from external text font 52 EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP 22 2 v 1 Basic fontinst file 55 v 2 Verbose fontinst file 56 v 3 Inferior and superior figures 59 v 4 The map file
21. 2003 01 11 2003 01 04 2003 01 02 2002 12 30 2002 10 25 2002 08 11 2002 05 12 2002 04 17 REVISION HISTORY Added tables 1 and 2 to section 1 6 Revised section 1 6 adding note about Latin Modern Revised section 1 5 Added preliminary hints concerning fontinst 1 9 to section Iv 1 Fixed problem with nfssext sty sections 111 3 v 5 and v1 4 Improved support for swashes in nfssext sty section v1 4 Revised discussion of ornaments in section v1 6 Revised discussion of swashes in section v1 1 Added spelling corrections by William Adams Added spelling corrections by Adrian Burd Added Gnu Free Documentation License to the appendix Added explicit licensing clause Final release for fontinst 1 8 Added tutorial v1 Updated notes on contributions Added spelling corrections and suggestions by Timothy Eyre Revised section 1 5 splitting off section 1 6 Added section 111 4 Updated notes on contributions Revised section Iv 2 Updated notes on contributions Added highlighting to code listings Added spelling corrections by Adrian Heathcote Added spelling corrections by William Adams Added section 11 2 Revised section 11 3 Revised introduction Revised tutorial 111 Added discussion of kerning issues to section 111 1 Revised discussion of oT1 encoding in tutorial 1 Added minor changes to code tables Added code table 4 to appendix Revised note on code tables in appendix Added tutorial v Added code tables 3 5 a
22. 23 0 507 705 Compare that to the glyph names of figures in an expert font C 48 WX 511 N zerooldstyle B 40 14 480 436 C 49 WX 328 N oneoldstyle B 35 3 294 425 C 50 WX 440 N twooldstyle B 44 3 427 436 33 34 OPTICAL SMALL CAPS AND HANGING FIGURES The different glyph names are appropriate because regular Postscript fonts usu ally come with lining figures by default while expert fonts feature hanging old style figures amongst other things Now let s take a look at psbrc8a afm C 48 WX 556 N zero B 41 15 515 457 C 49 WX 556 None B 108 0 448 442 C 50 WX 556 N two B 72 0 512 457 When comparing these glyph names to the actual outlines in psbrc8a pfb we would see that this font in fact comes with hanging old style figures even though the figures are labeled using the standard names This is the case with all osr fonts included in the sc amp osr package The reason why this complicates the installation procedure will become clear when we take a look at the Tex side In T1 encoding for example the figures are essentially encoded like this by default setslot zero endsetslot setslot one endsetslot setslot two endsetslot While Ts1 encoding essentially references them as follows setslot zerooldstyle endsetslot setslot oneoldstyle endsetslot setslot twooldstyle endsetslot We face a similar problem with small caps The lowercase letters in p
23. 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 70 EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP installfont pmnric9d kernoff pmnri8r pmnri8x kernon glyphoff pmnric8r glyphon resetosf resetsc latinsc t1cj T1 pmnj m si For the small caps shape of the pmnj family we essentially use the technique introduced above Since this font family will feature hanging figures we use the encoding file t1cj etx and add the metric file resetosf mtx instal font pmns9d pmns8r pmns8x latin t1j T1 pmnj sb n instal font pmnsi9d pmnsi8r pmnsi8x latin t1j 11 pmnj sb it instal font pmnsc9d kernoff pmns8r pmns8x kernon glyphoff pmnsc8r glyphon resetosf resetsc latinsc t1cj T1 pmnj sb sc installfont pmnsic9d kernoff pmnsi8r pmnsi8x kernon glyphoff pmnsic8r glyphon resetosf resetsc latinsc t1cj T1 pmnj sb si Again we repeat these steps for the semibold weight instal1 font pmnb9d pmnb8r pmnb8x latin t1j T1 pmnj b n instal1 font pmnbi9d pmnbi8r pmnbi8x latin t1j T1 pmnj b it instal1 font pmnc9d pmnc8r pmnc8x latin t1j T1 pmnj eb n endinstallfonts The bold and black weights are essentially handled like those of the pmnx family only differing in the choice of the encoding file installfonts instal family T1 pmn0 installfont pmn
24. De redactie zal dus bestaan uit Niels Moes Piet van Oostrum en Ernst van der Storm Daarnaast zullen Frans Goddijn en ikzelf vanuit het bestuur de redactie voorlopig blijven ondersteunen Dat wil niet zeggen dat Siep Kroonenberg en Taco Hoekwater zich niet meer met de MAPS zullen bemoeien integendeel zij zullen het leeuwendeel van het werk blij ven verrichten Zij vormen het productie team dat zich primair richt op de vormgeving en het zetten van de MAPS Bij gebrek aan een actieve redactie is de voor u liggende MAPS grotendeels door Frans Goddijn en mijzelf bijeen gebracht en we denken dat we daar in intensieve samen werking met Siep Kroonenberg in geslaagd zijn en dat is vooral daaraan te danken dat we enkelen van u bereid heb ben gevonden het hart uit te storten Najaar 2003 Frans Goddijn levert een eloquent en rijk ge llustreerd verslag van de 32 NTG bijeenkomst Erik Frambach laat zien dat ook andere Local Users Groups niet ontkomen aan problemen bij het produceren van hun tijdschriften en dat niet alleen Koen Wybo beschrijft zijn ervaringen als beginneling op LaTgX gebied en geeft een overzicht van veel documentatie bronnen Kees van der Laan doet uitgebreid verslag van de BachoTIEX2003 Wybo Dekker probeert de Toolbox weer nieuw leven in te blazen Simon Pepping laat zien hoe conTEXt kan worden gebruikt om DocBook documenten te zetten van twee niet NTG leden Sjouke Mauw en Victor Bos hebben we een int
25. For an article the situation is much more fuzzy While I counted only 6 top level front matter elements I identified 60 top level bodymatter elements The situation is compli cated by the fact that some of these 60 top level bodymatter elements may occur in the frontmatter at a lower level For example abstract authorblurb and address may occur within the element articleinfo which itself is a main constituent of the front matter They may also occur as top level elements in which case I consider them as part of the bodymatter The transitions between the other section blocks are fortunately more clearly marked The complete analysis is contained in the documentation in the module itself The situation is programmed using the commands XMLDBmayensurebodymatter and XMLDBmayensurebackmatter All top level bodymatter and backmatter elements exe cute the appropriate command These commands check if the element is a direct child of the document element i e if the depth of the context stack equals 2 and if the corre sponding section block has not yet been started The current section block is kept in the variable XMLDBsectionblock Specific elements Tables Docbook uses the CALS table model ConTpxt uses two different table models One is the tabulate environment which is based upon TEX s halign It is quite sensitive to ex pansion timing errors The other is the TABLE environment also called natural tables It Najaar 2003 xml
26. M Stallman Linus Torvalds and Donald E voor het project en is vanaf Knuth engage in a discussion on whose impact on een bepaald point of no re the computerized world was the greatest turn ook de overlevingskans Stallman God told me I have programmed the best vergroot Herman Bruyninckx editor in the world prof aan de K U Leuven en Torvalds Well God told me that have heftig voorstander van vrije programmed the best operating system in the world software heeft heel wat argu Knuth Wait wait I never said that menten 14 in het voordeel van Open Software 4 Produc From rec humor funny submitted by ermel gmx de ten gebaseerd op TEX die niet Erik Meltzer open zijn beveel ik niet aan bij vrienden die ook met een TEX variant willen beginnen Een uitspraak die erg cru lijkt Uiteindelijk komt het neer op je niet laten inpalmen door een producent die je afhankelijk wil maken van zijn software Voor je het weet ben je vastgeklonken aan n bepaald pro duct Naast een vlotte interface is het wijs om oog te hebben voor duurzaamheid op lange termijn Het voordeel van een open standaard is bekend Internet heeft er zijn bestaan aan te danken Juist door het feit dat iedereen de technische aspecten van de standaard ter inzage heeft kan het niet gemonopoliseerd worden door n bepaalde fabrikant Het naleven van een standaard garandeert een langere levensduur van de software standaar den worden pas vervangen als er techno
27. Maps wordt gezet met behulp van een LaTgxX class file en een ConTeXt module Het Ppr bestand voor de drukker wordt aangemaakt met behulp van pdfetex 1 11b Web2C 7 5 2 draaiend onder Linux 2 4 De gebruikte fonts zijn Adobe Times Roman met Old Style Figures Adobe Frutiger en de vrije txfonts fontset TEX is een door professor Donald E Knuth ontwikkelde opmaaktaal voor het letter zetten van documenten een documentopmaaksysteem Met TEX is het mogelijk om kwalitatief hoogstaand drukwerk te vervaardigen Het is eveneens zeer geschikt voor formules in mathematische teksten Er is een aantal op IEX gebaseerde producten waarmee ook de logische structuur van een document beschreven kan worden met behoud van de letterzet mogelijkheden van TEX Voorbeelden zijn LaTEX van Leslie Lamport AMS T X van Michael Spivak en ConTgxXt van Hans Hagen Inhoudsopgave Nummer 29 najaar 2003 Redactioneel Wybo Dekker 1 32 NTG bijeenkomst Frans Goddijn 2 TEX user groups worldwide what s cooking Erik Frambach 6 LaTpx een newbie ervaring Koen Wybo 10 BachoIEX2003 Kees van der Laan 15 Toolbox Wybo Dekker 24 Docbook In ConTEXt Simon Pepping 26 Drawing Message Sequence Charts with LaT X Sjouke Mauw and Victor Bos 38 Labels voor gevaarlijke stoffen met LaTEX Roland Smith 44 Aligning Metapost graphs in ConTEXt combinations Karel H Wesseling 50 Drawing a type case in ConTpxt Willi Egger 53 Optisch uitvullen in de Maps
28. Modern fonts this is fine since they actually include bold extended fonts For font families which do not however using these macros would result in a warn ing To avoid that you would need to redefine bfdef ault to a suitable weight The problem here is that bfdefault is a global setting applying to all of La tex s font families rmdefault sfdefault and ttdefault but it is not safe to assume that all of them will offer the same weights To avoid any need to redefine bfdefault unless we really want to we set up an alias so that ev ery request for bold extended bx is substituted by bold b Unless bold extended fonts are available simply think of bx as the default bold weight The standard weight is selected by Latex in a similar way The relevant macro is called mddefault and defaults to m Make sure that the NFss series m is always defined either mapped to actual fonts or as a substitution In this case our font family provides regular weight fonts so we will simply use them for the m series Some font families however are based on the main weights light and demibold instead of regular and bold In this case we would either just map these weights to the m and b series directly or use the proper NFss series codes 1 and db plus the following substitutions substitutesilent m 1 substitutesilent bx db 1 This is a default substitution that fontinst will always silently include We c
29. Nordic group Volunteers you can t rely on them to live up to expect ations 4TEX TEXlive journals conferences etc You can t force them either so you need a more subtle manage ment style to encourage and support them International cooperation Although all lugs have similar goals their activities may interfere with each other and opportunities for cooperation and synergy may be missed Conferences lack of coordination may cause dates of major meetings to clash too often the organization depends on the same volunteers financial risks are unclear and cer tainly not covered by the whole group of lugs Journals distribution of journals to all lugs is still not in place exchange of interesting articles and translation ser vices are still poor indexes of all journals or an index of all journals combined is lacking better still would be a data base but that is definitely beyond reach online availabil ity of journals articles and crossreferencing is very poor or non existing Najaar 2003 community Finance banking costs are not well managed result ing in loss of money conference budgets and reports on financial results are not standardized or not available at all EuroTgxX amp TUG Conference coordination and selec tion of organizing parties is very obscure nevertheless conferences are usually very successful pdfTEX international
30. TEX meetings in The Netherlands Germany Poland the UK and the USA it became clear that currently several TEX user groups local user groups lugs for short are facing similar problems These problems include constitutional crises failures to produce journals membership decline and financial diffi culties We will point out and discuss some of these problems and we will attempt to provide recommendations for solv ing and or preventing them History Since the birth of TEX in 1978 many lugs were formed In Table 1 we ve listed some highlights in lugs history It s remarkable that most lugs were formed in the last decade Undoubtably the Internet has played a major role here by providing easy and cheap means of software distribution FTP servers and World Wide Web servers and personal contacts Usenet News and email Gathering a historic overview of the founding and dis solving of lugs proved be be rather difficult No one seems to be keeping track of the history of lugs Even websites of existing user groups often provide little or no information on their history Analysis of the development of user groups over the years shows a distinct geographical bias Europe very many lugs were founded North America very few lugs were founded Asia only a few lugs were founded The many European lugs can be explained by the need for support for their own language in IEX e g DANTE NTG GUTen
31. an extensive DTD for technical literature Long ago extensive customizable stylesheets became available first in DSSSL later also in XSLT The Jade program and the Jade TEX macro package made it possible to run the DSSSL style sheets and print the output with high quality free tools This enabled one to author format and print Docbook documents without expensive software tools With the advent of XML and XSLT more free tools have become available These combined features have made the Docbook DTD the DTD of choice for tech nical literature The Linux Documentation Project is one well known project that switched over from a private DTD to the Docbook DTD Due to this strong posi tion the toolset for working with Docbook documents is growing rapidly see e g http www miwie org docbookinfo htm13 How did it start and where is it now During EuroTpX 2001 in Kerkrade I had become interested in using ConTpXt because of the beautiful presentation styles used by Hans Hagen and several other speakers While I was following the ConTpXt email list I also became interested in ConTpXt s XML capabilities These seemed so wonderful to me that I had to understand how this could be done using TEX macro programming I started asking questions Sometimes Hans answers such questions with the suggestion that one take up some or other project So he suggested that I start an XML mapping for Docbook I really had other plans but I was so intrigued with C
32. and add the features we need We will create two Latex font families psb and psbj The former will provide lining figures while the latter will use the hanging fig ures of the osr fonts instead Both families will incorporate optical small caps where available In the following all comments concerning the fontinst file will be restricted to those aspects diverging from our template Please refer to the previous tutorial for a commentary on the original template input fontinst sty substitutesilent bx b substitutesilent sc n setint smallcapsscale 800 setint slant 167 transformfont psbr8r reencodefont 8r fromafm psbr8a transformfont psbri8r reencodefont 8r fromafm psbri8a transformfont psbb8r reencodefont 8r fromafm psbb8a transformfont psbbi8r reencodefont 8r fromafm psbbi8a transformfont psbrc8r i i reencodefont 8r fromafm psbrc8a transformfont psbrij8r reencodefont 8r fromafm psbri j8a transformfont transformfont psbbj8r psbbij8 reencodefont 8r fromafm psbbj8a reencodefont 8r fromafm psbbi j8a The first couple of lines of our template remain unchanged 1 9 After the reencodings inherited form our template we insert the additional fonts since they need to be reencoded as well 10 13 trans formfont transformfont transformfont transformfont psbro8r slantfont int slant r
33. bols Please refer to tutorial v for further information USING FONTINST 11 arately and can normally not be used independently in a sensible way We will use Sabon as an example in this tutorial The Sabon family offered by Adobe is split up into two packages The base package contains upright and italic fonts with lining figures in regular and bold weights while the so called sc amp OsF package provides optical small caps and hanging figures Hanging figures are also known as old style figures hence the name sc amp osF In the first and the second tutorial we will deal with the base package only Adding the sc amp osr package to the base install will be discussed in the third tutorial As we receive the package from Adobe or from a vendor it contains the following files sar__ afm sai___ afm sab__ afm sabi___ afm sar__ inf sai___ inf sab___ inf sabi___ inf sar__ pfb sai___ pfb sab__ pfb sabi___ pfb sar__ pfm sai___ pfm sab__ pfm sabi__ pfm Of those files we only need two types the font metrics in Ascii format afm and the binary font outlines pfb We copy these to our working directory to rename them In this case finding the proper names is simple because the typeface is listed explicitly in adobe map psbr8a Sabon Roman A 088 sar psbri8a Sabon Italic A 088 sai psbb8a Sabon Bold A 088 sab psbbi8a Sabon BoldItalic A 088 sabi The first column indicates the Fontname name and the last column the orig inal na
34. cooperation made this product flourish NTS many lessons were learned but this aca demic exercise doesn t justify its costs Omega lack of cooperation repels users and volunteers and frustrates de velopment The Good News The gloomy list of internal problems above may give you the impression that lugs are doomed Indeed there is lots of room for improvement but let s not forget what we ve achieved Here s an overview of only a few successes in which lugs played an important role TEXlive cd rom this product made TEX easily access able to users on all major operating systems standardizing the way TEX installations are configured CTAN and CTAN cd roms CTAN has been a valu able repository of all TEX related software where countless users with Internet access have found the resources they needed The cd rom versions are very useful for those with no or limited access to the Internet Though not intended to the cd roms also serve as historic snap shots by freezing archives at regular intervals 4TEX this product was the first to provide a true plug amp play TEX environment that could run completely from cd rom remember disk space was expensive back then and contained all tools usually found in commercial word processors pdfTEX this product instantly warped IEX into the new era of PDF documents and all their extra features like hy pertext and web links pdf IEX even made Adob
35. cz as tsch examples steszczin streszczenie rz as z example Andrzej ch as h example chchatbym There is some good news however Zofia Walcsak coined the idea of teaching us Polish before along and after the conference informally but more structured than along the meals social gatherings or during the guitars in the night And why not a weekly follow up of lessons by email Some sort of network academy Splendid we like that s So GUST why don t you give it a try 11 I could not spot it nor its documentation on the CTAN 2002 CD ROMs nor on the TgX live 6 CD ROM A keyword facility similar to the one on NTG s MAPS 1 24 CD ROM of 2001 would be useful 12 I was pointed out to some dangers zapomnjat means in Russian to remember and in Polish the oppos ite to forget 13 The simultaneous translations for a small group somewhere in the room is not sufficient either 14 At home Beer suffered again from several ticks since last year I go to Bachotek with a tickpincer 15 Since Januari Sveta and I enjoy satellite TV next to the cable and we can watch Russian TV and Po land I and II Who knows what that will bring I know I know no way of picking up a single word at the moment but maybe there are some educational broadcasts for children 16 Maybe it will attrack more foreign participants My wishes To pronounce the words correctly To understand the songs and to be able to join the quire in at least one of the traditiona
36. diacritical characters as extensions to the CM fonts As usual Jacko s contributions are very well prepared It seems that he is a professional in the sense of G E Forsythe a professional starts where an amateur ends He provided English copies of his e pages the digital follow up of the old transparencies slides or foils Moreover the underlying paper in the proceedings was in English Thank you Jacko His walk along history lane of character embellishments well necessary extras was apparently influenced by the lecture style of Andrzej Tomaszewski Nice These new Latin Modern fonts geared towards Polish diacritical characters will be released in the exotic Hawaii Thank you Jacko your BoP company and the sponsors DANTE NTG Polishing TEX has a history already I remember the beginnings where the precise positioning of the embellishments were at stake Now it is about uniting elements about composed characters as one integrated symbol in order to get rid of the problems in scaling among others I presume MetaPost macros for dashing of closed areas Bogustaw Jackowski He made use of the fact that MetaPost allows multiple occurrences of the operator withcolor in a single drawing statement Thanks to that property the operator withcolor can cleverly be redefined to perform hatching rather than filling Nice I have to study the details and re do it to get the hang of it I guess that the macros are available on the GUST fileserve
37. flitste voorbij waarna een ander document in PDF werd bekeken Na verloop van tijd bleek het een systeem te zijn dat in principe verwantschap heeft met de aanpak van Johan Vromans MMDS Hier kon de gebruiker allerlei keuzes en opties menugestuurd aanklikken waarmee op simpele wijze mogelijkheden beschikbaar komen die er normaal alleen zijn voor mensen die niet bang zijn van gecompliceerde command line variabelen Een opvolger voor 4TEX Michael Guravage smeedt TEX plannen met Patrick Gundlach Roland Kwee l en Willi Egger r MAPS NTG bijeenkomst Hans heeft weleens verteld dat bij grotere instellingen die TEX voor publicaties gebruiken de trend bestaat om TEX te beschouwen en te gebruiken als back end als een applicatie waar de meeste gebruikers niet veel meer mee te maken hebben omdat TEX op de achtergrond zijn werk doet Deze nieuw getoonde schil een slim PDF document waarmee op de achtergrond allerlei TEX trucs kunnen worden aangestuurd lijkt ook die richting op te gaan Intussen arriveerden zangeres Tenar van Kooten Niekerk en pianiste Cathelijne Maat Ondanks de erbarmelijk ontstemde piano van het hotel brachten de beide vrouwen met grote flair en helderheid een sprankelend programma Deze weken staan zij met twee collega s in een Arnhems theater met een show rond een reeks liedjes over de liefde Willi Egger had een aantal liedteksten met behulp van ConTpxt in een kleine programmafolder gezet Mede dankzij het inspirerende en
38. glyphs are encoded as ordinary lowercase letters Hence we need to add kernon mtx and kernoff mtx to discard the kerning data in psbrc8r 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 38 OPTICAL SMALL CAPS AND HANGING FIGURES installfont psbrcj8t psbre8r latin t1 TI psbj m sc The small caps font does not require any modifications this time psbrc8r al ready contains hanging figures so we can use it as is Since psbrc8r uses stan dard glyph names for small caps and hanging figures we use the regular encod ing vector t1 etx installfont psbroj8t psbro8r unsetnum kernoff psbrco8r kernon latin t1 T1 psbj m s1 The slanted shape is straightforward to the upright one we read psbro8r clear the figures and add the slanted hanging figures provided by psbrco8r We also toggle fontinst s setkern macro by adding kernon and kernoff installfont psbrij8t psbrij8r latin t1 T1 psbj m it Building the italic virtual font is trivial because we have an italic osr font with easily accessible hanging figures in the standard slots Since there are osF fonts for all bold shapes as well they do not require any special modifications either We simply use the appropriate osr fonts instead of the fonts from the basic Sabon package install font psbbj8t psbbj8r latin t1 T1 psbj b n install font psbbcj8t psbbj8r latin t1c T1 psbj b sc We create faked bold small caps us
39. in Con Iet The table with the rest of the letters applications Due to the fact that the last row of this table has the height of two ordinary rows this has to be setup so setupTABLE r last height 12ex w P j hel unne spaties i 8 h S dunne 8 sup gt spaties spaties o p IJ spt inf vierkanten a r i kwadraat wit bTABLE setupTABLE c 1 width 5 25em setupTABLE c 2 3 4 5 6 7 width 2 625em setupTABLE r last height 12ex bTR bTD w eTD bTD nr 2 tfx dunne spaties eTD bTD nr 2 eTD bTD nr 2 g eTD bTD nr 2 h eTD bTD j eTD bTD hel eTD eTR bTR bTD s eTD bTD eTD Najaar 2003 bTD eTD eTR bTR bTD nr 2 o eTD bTD nr 2 p eTD bTD nr 2 ij eTD bTD tf x sup eTD bTD tf xx dunne spaties eTD bTD nc 2 tfx spaties eTD eTR bTR bTD tf x frac 1 2 pt eTD bTD tfx inf eTD bTD nc 2 tf x vierkanten eTD eTR bTR bTD a eTD bTD nc 2 r eTD bTD eTD bTD eTD bTD nc 2 tfx kwadraat wit eTD eTR eTABLE 57 applications Assembly of the type case In order to present the drawing as a type case the four tables are put into a frame To get the placement right several steps are necessary First two times two tables are placed into a hbox The horizontal placement is achieved by removeunwantedspaces quad Vertically the two hboxes are
40. is the role attribute of the para element It is not possible to define actions for such attributes in the stylesheet because the possible values are not known The idea arose to put a hook in the stylesheet for the user s own for matting command Something like attributeaction para role The user could define such an action with something like defineXMLattributeaction para role The stylesheet should invoke the attribute action within a group in order to allow the user to change fonts etc for this element Therefore ConTEXt cannot invoke the attribute action automatically because it cannot know where it should do so For example some MAPS Docbook In ConTgxt mappings for the opening tag invoke egroup if the attribute action had been invoked automatically its scope would be ended immediately This idea has not yet been imple mented I am not sure how far customization can go Enabling extreme customizability would come down to defining a new language for describing the formatting of a Docbook doc ument This would go too far On the other hand customizability is a strong feature of ConTpxt It is not difficult to add customizability options to the stylesheet ConTpXt has some good commands for that Acknowledgement The first versions of the mappings for several elements a o the ulink element were contributed by Michael Wiedmann He also contributed the string literal files for English and German Giuseppe Bilotta contri
41. lt 0T1 gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt s1 gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbbo8t gt lt psbbo8r latin gt lt T1 gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt s1 gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbbo8c gt lt psbbo8r textcomp gt lt TS1 gt lt TS1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt s1 gt NFO gt run transformfont lt psbbi8r gt from lt psbbi8a gt 30 STANDARD FONT SETS INFO gt run installrawfont lt psbbi8r gt lt psbbi8r 8r gt lt 8r gt lt 8r gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt i t gt INFO gt run installfont lt psbbi7t gt lt psbbi8r latin gt lt 0T1i gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt it gt INFO gt run installfont lt psbbi8t gt lt psbbi8r latin gt lt T1i gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt i t gt INFO gt run installfont lt psbbi8c gt lt psbbi8r textcomp gt lt TS1i gt lt TS1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt i t gt This listing is a complete summary of what the latinfamily macro does in this case broken down into lower level commands The order of the commands differs slightly from our file because the transf ormf ont calls are not grouped at the beginning but rather used on demand for each shape This difference is irrelevant from a technical point of view transformfont must obviously be called before installfont or installrawf ont tries to use the transformed fonts but the exact location does not matter Since we did not create any font description files for Tex Base 1 encoding we did not use the insta
42. math alphabet osstyle relax exfs try family expandafter exfs get base f family nil j The macros lnstyle and osstyle switch to lining and hanging old style figures respectively They are like bfseries or itshape Internally they will take the first three letters of the current Nrss font family name 18 append a letter to it where appropriate none for lining figures j for hanging figures and call exfs try family Even though this mechanism is rather simple minded it should work just fine for all fonts set up properly according to the Fontname scheme DeclareTextFontCommand text1n Instyle DeclareTextFontCommand textos osstyle endinput The corresponding text commands textln and textos take one manda tory argument and can be employed like textbf or textit u1 4 Fonts supplied with Tex The standard Postscript fonts supplied with most Tex distributions do not in clude optical small caps nor do they include hanging figures The default type face of both plain Tex and Latex however Computer Modern Roman does in clude such glyphs Unfortunately the design of the small caps is flawed Their height corresponds to what you usually end up with when creating mechanical small caps Being too tall these small caps hardly blend in with lowercase text at all even though their color matches that of the lowercase alphabet Hanging figures are included in Computer Modern as well but they are hid den in some of th
43. may also be accomplished like this def makefnmark hbox sustyle thefnmark Note that if you want to put a definition of makefnmark in the preamble of a regular Latex input file as opposed to a class or a style file it has to be enclosed in makeatletter and makeatother makeatletter def makefnmark hbox sustyle thefnmark makeatother TUTORIAL VI EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP In this tutorial we will combine what we have learned in tutorials 111 and v to install a very complete font set featuring expert fonts small caps and hang ing figures This tutorial will also add multiple weights italic small caps italic swashes and text ornaments to that Our example is Adobe Minion base plus expert packages pmnr8a Minion Regular 143 morg pmnri8a Minion Italic 143 moi pmns8a Minion Semibold 143 mosb_ pmnsi8a Minion SemiboldItalic 143 mosbi_ pmnb8a Minion Bold 143 mobo pmnbi8a Minion BoldItalic 143 mobi pmnc8a Minion Black 143 mobl_ pmnrc8a Minion RegularSC pmnric8a Minion ItalicSC pmnriw7a Minion SwashItalic 144 mosc 144 moisc 144 moswi_ pmnsc8a Minion SemiboldSC 144 mosbs_ pmnsic8a Minion SemiboldItalicSC 144 mosic pmnsiw7a Minion SwashSemiboldItalic 144 mossb_ pmnbj8a Minion BoldOsF 144 mobos___ pmnbij8a Minion BoldItalicOsF 144 mobio___ pmncj8a Minion BlackOsF 144 mozof_ pmnr8x MinionExp Regular 144 mjrg_ pmnri8x MinionExp Italic 144 mji pmns8x MinionExp Semibold 144 mjsb___ pmnsi8x Minio
44. mscs which were not discussed in this paper Najaar 2003 application 1 The abstraction level of the Msc macro package is as desired 2 The user has full control over the relative position of instances messages etc 3 Changing MsCs e g adding extra instances or messages is easy and does not require computations by the user 4 The msc macro package is highly configurable There are about 30 user definable length parameters and a small number of text parameters The developers of the Msc macro package consider the package more or less complete Therefore the only changes to the package will be bug fixes and or code documentation References BM02a Victor Bos and Sjouke Mauw A LaTpX macro package for Message Sequence Charts Reference Manual Describing msc macro package version 1 13 April 2002 Included in MSC macro package distribution BM02b Victor Bos and Sjouke Mauw A LaTpX macro package for Message Sequence Charts User Manual Describing MSC macro package version 1 13 April 2002 Included in MSC macro package distribution GMS94 Michel Goossens Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin The LaTpX Companion Addison Wesley 1994 IT01 ITU TS TU TS Recommendation Z 120 Message Sequence Chart MSC ITU TS Geneva 2001 RGG96 E Rudolph P Graubmann and J Grabowski Tutorial on message sequence charts msc 96 In FORTE 1996 vZ93 Timothy van Zandt Pstricks PostScript macr
45. n DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj bx sl lt gt ssub mjnx b s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj bx it lt gt ssub mjnx b it endinput This is the equivalent for mjn0 the file tsimjnO fd ProvidesFile tslmjn0 fd DeclareFontFamily TS1 mjn0 DeclareFontShape TS1 mjn0 m n lt gt ssub mjnx m n Decl Decl Decl Decl Decl Dec Decl Decl Decl areFontShape TS1 areFontShape TS1 areFontShape TS1 areFontShape TS1 areFontShape TS1 areFontShape areFontShape TS1 areFontShape TS1 areFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 endinput 1 mjn0 THE MAP FILE mjn0 mjn0 mjn0 mjn0 mjn0 m m m b b b b mjn0 mjn0 bx n mjn0 bx sc mjn0 bx s1 mjn0 bx it ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub a a a a ddddddddd sd jnx m n jnx m s1 jnx m i jnx b n jnx b n jnx b s1 jnx b i jnx b n jnx b n jnx b s1 jnx b i And finally tsimjni1 fd for the mjn1 family ProvidesFile ts1mjnl DeclareFontFamily TS DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape endinp
46. not requiring the small caps fonts after the metrics and the virtual fonts have been generated result ing in slightly smaller ppr and Postscript files if fonts are embedded The input file list should be more or less self explanatory we use kernoff mtx to ignore the kerning data while reading the respective base and expert fonts Then we add kernon mtx to re activate the kerning commands and a special metric file called glyphoff mtx to ignore the glyph data After that we read the corre sponding small caps font and re activate the glyph commands Finally we add resetsc mtx as well as latinsc mtx Our encoding file is tic etx instal 1 font pmns9e pmns8r pmns8x latin t1 T1 pmnx sb n instal font pmnsi9e pmnsi8r pmnsi8x latin t1 11 pmnx sb it install font pmnsc9e kernoff pmns8r pmns8x kernon glyphoff pmnsc8r glyphon resetsc latinsc tlc T1 pmnx sb sc installfont pmnsic9e kernoff pmnsi8r pmnsi8x kernon glyphoff pmnsic8r glyphon resetsc latinsc t1c T1 pmnx sb si We repeat these steps for the semibold weight instal font pmnb9e pmnb8r pmnb8x latin t1 T1 pmnx b n instal1 font pmnbi9e pmnbi8r pmnbi8x latin t1 T1 pmnx b it instal font pmnc9e pmnc8r pmnc8x latin t1 T1 pmnx eb n The bold and black weights are handled differently because there are no optical small caps We will simply omit the respective sh
47. oh yes I know it is a buzzword but 10 years ago I already day dreamed in this direction see my What is TEX and Metafont all about We could start a multi media project in teaching eg Polish for foreigners with TEX amp Co somewhere under the hood gt Hans forms could be used as interface for drilling such that one can only proceed when results of the tests so far are sufficient This kind of computer assisted multi media training I watched in practice when Sveta was learning Dutch It is the modern way of learning foreign languages The point I like to make is that next to typesetting one badly needs compact sound and video for e paper on CD ROM DVD and WWW but this is beyond IEX s purpose For acceptable transport time on the WWW we need still better compression techniques and or faster transmission possibilities 2 MP3 as compression for audio is not perceived as good enough The multi media examples I like are art CD ROMs such as Escher Interactief and Het mysterie Margritte een surrealistische ontmoeting met Margritte the various CD ROM encyclopedia the e dictionaries with pronunciation options and the Wining and Dinings to learn Spanish cooking for example Another aspect why we are in a weak position with respects to grants is that volunteers biased User Groups are not the structures for making real advances Developments are made Definitely Somebody sometime somewhere at BachoTgX made the
48. opmaak die verdwijnt na het knippen plakken in een ander bestand hoofdingen die plots de standaardstijl niet meer respecteren enzovoorts Al deze el lende begint je na verloop van tijd de keel uit te hangen Gekoppeld aan het gevoel dat jij moet voldoen aan de software in plaats van omgekeerd leidt dit bij mij tot de conclusie dat WYSIWYG software niet optimaal is Een ander belangrijk emotioneel aspect is toch wel het esthetisch verschil tussen pagina s opgemaakt met LaT X en die van een grafisch tekstverwerkingsprogramma Daar kan je alleen maar jaloers op worden Economisch Je zou het nauwelijks verwachten dat ook een Vlaming naar zijn portemonnee kijkt En toch Schaf je je verschillende versies aan van het officepakket van de marktleider dan mag je tweejaarlijks een behoorlijk bedrag op tafel leggen Je kan het natuurlijk wel bij het oorspronkelijke product houden van een tiental jaar terug maar dan is het hopen dat je collega s niet upgraden naar meer recente versies Jij zal dan onmogelijk hun document kunnen openen Om nog maar te zwijgen van de restrictieve licenties de Rights Manage ment Services en de verplichte upgrade van het totale Windows besturingssysteem die de maker van het meest verspreide office pakket zal inbouwen in zijn nieuw product Niet te vergeten natuurlijk de aanschaf van een virusscanner want deze documenten blijken soms beestjes in zich te dragen Als tijd geld is dan is de ov
49. passe partouts Jacko also practices this approach as can be witnessed from his presentations Nice Lectures I realize that I won t do justice below to the majority of Polish speakers by not mention ing them I just could not profit from most of the lectures because they were in Polish no English abstracts let alone summaries but the titles were in English fortunately And sigh after so many years I only can approximately say in w yes tak no nie OK dobry bad z y good morning day dzie dobry good evening dobry wiecz r sorry przepraszam thank you dziekuje don t mention it niema za co please prosze goodbye dowidzenia lake jezioro lecture room sala wyk adowa open otwarte closed zamkniete key klucz how jak silent tigo sir pan dining room stolowka breakfast sniadania lunch obiad dinner kolacja menu karta beet soup barszcz sauerkraut and meat bigos mushroom grip bon appetit smasnego I love you ja kocham ciewie I can order a beer vodka edno piwo edna wodka or a cup of tea coffee herbata kawia and similar trivia in Polish No way of reading Polish let alone under standing a lecture despite my recently acquired knowledge of Russian I m sorry 3 But there is hope I learned some more words plit ok streszczenie and klesh 4 one diminitive Katarzyna and from my guide the pronunciation of the combination of let ters sz pronounced as sch
50. pmnrp pfb v1 4 Extending the user interface Before creating a style file for Minion we will update nfssext sty one more time to support its additional features Support for swashes is easily added since the framework is already in place Therefore the first part of the file does not require any changes we simply add support for swashes by defining swstyle in a similar vein 40 42 NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage nfssext 2003 03 14 v1 2 Experimental NFSS Extensions newcommand exfs tempa newcommand exfs tempb newcommand exfs try fami ly 2 let exfs tempa relax begingroup font fami ly 2 try load fontshape expandafter i fx csname curr fontshape endcsname rel ax edef exfs tempa 1 ifx exfs tempa empty PackageWarning nfssext Font family f encoding 2 not available MessageBreak Ignoring font switch else PackageInfo nfssext Font family f encoding 2 not available MessageBreak Font family f encoding 1 tried instead exfs try family 1 fi else gdef exfs tempa fontfamily 2 selectfont fi endgroup exfs tempa def exfs get base 1 2 3 4 Onil 1 2 3 DeclareRobustCommand Instyle not math al phabet Instyle relax exfs try family expandafter exfs get base fefamily nil expandafter exfs get base f family nil x DeclareRobustCommand osstyle not math al phabet osstyle relax exfs try family expandafter exfs get base f family n
51. psb m n DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj m sc lt gt ssub psb m sc DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj m s1 lt gt ssub psb m s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj m it lt gt ssub psb m it DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj b n lt gt ssub psb b n DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj b sc lt gt ssub psb b sc DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj b sl lt gt ssub psb b s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj b it lt gt ssub psb b it DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj bx n lt gt ssub psb b n DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj bx sc lt gt ssub psb b sc DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj bx s1 lt gt ssub psb b s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj bx it lt gt ssub psb b it endinput The syntax of font definition files is explained in the Latex font selection guide and will not be discussed in detail here The main point of this file should be evident for all series and shapes we substitute TS1 psb for TS1 psbj because we did not create virtual fonts for TS1 psbj The ssub directive is a silent sub stitution For details see chapter 4 of the font selection guide section 4 4 in particular With this additional font definition file we now have a fully func tional setup for psb and psbj in T1 and Ts1 encoding v1 2 The map file After running the fontinst file through Tex and installing the new fonts we still need to update the map file psb map We add the following lines f
52. remark that real progress can apparently only be made at an University where PHD students may invent new techniques supervised by a professor with vision like Knuth in want for the results Han Th Thanh with his pdf IEX guided by Jiri Zlatu ka seems to be an example Workshops As usual before and after the meeting tutorials were offered Very useful for the new comers and for those who want to embark on a new corner of TEX amp Co Andrzej on bookcover design Chris on digital presentations tools Janusz Bien on GNU emacs for LaT X users Jacek Kmiecik on LaT X a second step and Stachek on config uring and fine tuning of TEX installations under windows and linux 23 I m sorry that I did not make notes of the projects Jerzy listed 24 A less ambitious project was LaTEX3 which also seems to have slipped of the road eTEX and PDFTEX a nearly one man s effort are successful though 25 Is the functionality Polish for foreigners on CD ROM DVD already available If not that can be granted I m sure 26 Maybe internet via satellite 27 Was it Ulrik MAPS BachoTX2003 Social events Bonfire The social event is the traditional bonfire with sausages to be grilled and potatoes to be baked in the ashes while the guitars in the night are playing with the people around as quire Jacko and his family are really great not only because of their guitar playing their a capella is something you should have liste
53. section for map files lines defining map files begin with a lowercase p and add the new map file so that the updated section looks as follows Standard map file provided by default p tpsfonts map New map file for Sabon p psb map The procedure for pdftex is similar the configuration file is called pdftex cfg and map files are marked with the string map at the beginning of the line After copying the file to the branch pdftex config of the local tree and updating it the relevant section should look similar to the following example Standard map file provided by default map pdftex map New map file for Sabon map psb map We repeat this step one more time for xdvi The configuration file for xdvi is called xdvi cfg the local branch is xdvi config and lines indicating a map file begin with dvipsmap USING THE FONTS 19 Map files provided by default dvipsmap ps2pk map dvipsmap New map file for Sabon dvipsmap psb map In addition to that we have to make sure that an encoding definition for Tex Base 1 encoding is provided as well The configuration file for xdvi should con tain the following line Tag Suffix Encoding name Encoding file enc 8r TeXBaselEncoding 8r enc The installation is now finished Do not forget to update the file hash tables by running texhash or an equivalent command 1 5 Using the fonts Everything you need to know about using the fonts can be found in the Latex
54. separated by a vskip of aex Finally to enclose the drawing in a frame the whole is placed into a framed command framed frame on rulethickness 1pt offset 5em align normal hbox getbuffer Caps removeunwantedspaces quad getbuffer Spec Char removeunwantedspaces vskip2ex hbox getbuffer Lower Case1 removeunwantedspaces quad getbuffer Lower Case2 removeunwantedspaces Willi Egger dunne spaties dunne spaties spaties inf vierkanten pasjes kwadraat wit 58 MAPS Drawing a type case in ConTExt applications This is a large table and will scale with the fontsize height definitions in ex and width definitions in em However in order to typeset this drawing to fit in a given typesetting layout one can use the following mechanism dunne spaties dunne n spaties spaties inf vierkanten pasjes kwadraat wit Figure 1 Layout of an ordinary dutch type case placefigure here Layout footnote quote sc BOEK em over het maken van boeken C sc BOOK on making books H van Krimpen 1966 of an ordinary dutch type case external figure Type Case type buffer
55. spaces or as long as the empty framed has a frame that s not made invisible Clearly METAPOST refuses to adapt its bounding box to invisible matter We on the other hand refuse to have extraneous matter printed Here is a solution that works nevertheless We let METAPOST draw a fullsquare xyscaled 10cm 8cm centered at the midpoint of the graph area This makes both graphs of equal width and height and alignment in a startcombination is perfect This is shown in Fig 1 right two panels The fullsquare is opaque Anything plotted before it is drawn disappears behind it anything plotted later is visible It must therefore be the first plot command in the picture In addition it must be given a color and the color might be considered undesirable The solution to that is to plot itwithcolor 9999white For all practical purposes this is as white as white paper is Here is the program for two curves within one graph MAPS Aligning METAPOST graphs in CONTEXT combinations startreusableMPgraphic outlier picture Panel 9999white for a white panel Panel image fill fullsquare xyscaled 10cm 8cm withcolor 9white draw begingraph 5cm 5cm the plot area is 5 x 5 cm setcoords linear linear always set coordinates or else setrange 210 100 230 125 then set range gdraw 220 112 5 plot Panel center horizontal amp vertical glabel top btex ibi ms etex 231 126 glabel bot btex time s etex 220 96 gdraw s
56. still one thing left to do The macro swstyle which we have defined above 40 42 will switch to the the font family providing italic swashes for example pmnw How ever it will not activate the italic shape It would be convenient to have a macro which takes care of all of that We first create an auxiliary macro holding the shape which provides the actual swashes newcommand swshapedefault itdefault Then we create a macro which will call swstyle and select the shape providing the italic swashes in one shot DeclareRobustCommand swshape not math al phabet swshape rel ax swstyle fontshape swshapedefault selectfont Finally we add text commands for our new font switches DeclareTextFontCommand text1n Instyle DeclareTextFontCommand textos osstyle DeclareTextFontCommand textin instyle DeclareTextFontCommand textsu sustyle DeclareTextFontCommand textsi sishape DeclareTextFontCommand textdf dfshape DeclareTextFontCommand textsw swshape As far as text is concerned all features of Minion are readily available at this point Using the ornaments would still require low level commands though 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 78 EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP v1 5 A high level interface for ornaments Technically ornament fonts are comparable to the euro fonts discussed in sec tion Iv 3 To typeset the first ornament of Minion for example we could us
57. the bold se ries We set a scale factor of 0 72 for that 4 mjnr8r reencodefont 8r fromafm mjnr8a mjnri8r reencodefont 8r fromafm mjnri8a mjnb8r reencodefont 8r fromafm mjnb8a mjnbi8r reencodefont 8r fromafm mjnbi 8a mjnro8r slantfont int slant reencodefont 8 mjnbo8r slantfont int slant reencodefont 8 transformfont transformfont transformfont transformfont transformfont transformfont r fromafm mjnr8a r fromafm mjnb8a We reencode 6 9 and slant 10 11 the basic fonts as usual Expert fonts do not require any reencoding but we do need slanted variants of them as well transformfont mjnro8x slantfont int slant fromafm mjnr8x transformfont mjnbo8x slantfont int slant fromafm mjnb8x We will create two font families mjnx featuring expert glyphs optical small caps and lining figures plus mjnj incorporating hanging instead of lining fig ures Ts1 encoded virtual fonts will be generated for the mjnx family only install fonts install fami ly T1 mjnx instal family TS1 mjnx installfont mjnr9e mjnr8r mjnr8x latin t1 T1 mjnx m n 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 58 EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP As mentioned above incorporating expert glyphs boils down to adding an ad ditional file to the arguments of the installfont command in this case
58. the full lists of invariant sections and required cover texts given in the document s license notice H Include an unaltered copy of this license Preserve the section entitled History preserve its title and add to it an item stating at least the title year new authors and publisher of the modified version as given on the title page If there is no section entitled History in the document create one stating the title year authors and publisher of the document as given on its title page then add an item describing the modified version as stated in the previous sentence J Preserve the network location if any given in the document for public ac cess to a transparent copy of the document and likewise the network lo cations given in the document for previous versions it was based on These THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE 91 may be placed in the History section You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the document itself or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission K For any section entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications preserve the title of the section and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and or dedications given there in L Preserve all the invariant sections of the document unaltered in their text and in their titles Section numbers or the equiva
59. the module If you do not give additional setup commands ConTpxt s defaults are applied This is an example of a driver file with ConTpxt setup commands input xtag docbook setupindenting medium setupheadertexts section pagenumber setupheader leftwidth 7 hsize style slanted setuppagenumbering location setupitemize each packed before after indentnext no Najaar 2003 xml 27 xml 28 Simon Pepping starttext processXMLfilegrouped jobname xml stoptext Docbook In ConTpxt defines a few setup commands and other customizations of its own Section blocks ConTEXt always applies pagebreaks around section blocks and it treats the Table of Contents and the Index as chapters This behaviour can be changed with the pagebreaks option of the setupXMLDB command o setupXMLDB pagebreaks al1 Default ConTEXt behaviour o setupXMLDB pagebreaks sectionblocks ToC and Index do not start a new page and they are treated as sections All other section blocks retain their default ConTEXt behaviour o setupXMLDB pagebreaks none In addition to the sectionblocks option bodymatter appendices and backmatter do not start a new page Titles Titles are formatted with a command of the form XMLDB XMLparent title where XMLDBparent should be replaced with the name of the element to which the title be longs e g XMLDBarticletitle These commands can be redefined They take one argument the title For
60. the raw font instal font mjnbo9e mjnbo8r mjnbo8x latin t1 T1 mjnx b sl installfont mjnbi9e mjnbi8r mjnbi8x latin t1 T1 mjnx b it That s it for T1 encoding Creating Ts1 encoded virtual fonts featuring expert glyphs is pretty straightforward We simply add the expert fonts to the input file list Note the encoding suffix of the virtual fonts We use 9c instead of 8c to indicate that the virtual fonts feature expert glyphs instal font mjnr9c installfont mjnro9c mjnr8r mjnr8x textcomp ts1 TS1 mjnx m installfont mjnri9c mjnro8r mjnro8x textcomp ts1 TS1 mjnx mjnri8r mjnri8x textcomp ts1 TS1 mjnx mjnb8r mjnb8x textcomp ts1 TS1 mjnx b mjnbo8r mjnbo8x textcomp ts1 TS1 mjnx mjnbi8r mjnbi8x textcomp ts1 TS1 mjnx n m installfont mjnb9c installfont mjnbo9c installfont mjnbi9c endinstall fonts H H H H H H Tos The mjnx family including 11 and Ts1 encoded fonts is now complete We con tinue with the mjnj family which we want to feature hanging figures by default install fonts instal family T1 mjnj instal font mjnr9d mjnr8r mjnr8x latin t1j T1 mjnj m n The encoding code 9d indicates a T1 encoded font with expert glyphs and hang ing figures We will use this code for all T encoded virtual fonts of the mjnj family This family is supposed to feature hanging figures in the standard en 35
61. then there are none The cover texts are certain short passages of text that are listed as front cover texts or back cover texts in the notice that says that the document is released under this license A front cover text may be at most five words and a back cover text may be at most 25 words A transparent copy of the document means a machine readable copy repre sented in a format whose specification is available to the general public that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or for images composed of pixels generic paint programs or for drawings some widely available drawing editor and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text for matters A copy made in an otherwise transparent file format whose markup or absence of markup has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not transparent An image format is not transparent if used for any substantial amount of text A copy that is not transparent is called opaque Examples of suitable formats for transparent copies include plain Ascii without markup Texinfo input format Latex input format SGML or XML us ing a publicly available DTD and standard conforming simple HTML Postscript or PDF designed for human modification Examples of transparent image for mats include PNG xcr and spa Opaque formats include propri
62. these warranty disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this license 2 Verbatim copying You may copy and distribute the document in any medium either commer cially or noncommercially provided that this license the copyright notices and the license notice saying this license applies to the document are reproduced in all copies and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this li cense You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute However you may accept compensation in exchange for copies If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3 You may also lend copies under the same conditions stated above and you may publicly display copies 3 Copying in quantity If you publish printed copies or copies in media that commonly have printed covers of the document numbering more than 100 and the document s li cense notice requires cover texts you must enclose the copies in covers that carry clearly and legibly all these cover texts front cover texts on the front cover and back cover texts on the back cover Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible You may add other material on the covers in addition Copying with c
63. think the only viable alternative would be to work with everypar because everypar is TEX s low level signal that there is new text Fortunately in a section a title is required so I did not yet have to work out this problem This is an example of the problems that arise because in an event based parse it is hard to determine if an optional element is not present The following section presents an example of the problems that arise because in an event based parse it is equally hard to determine when a certain group of elements is finished Sectioning Like many systems ConT Xt partitions its document in frontmatter bodymatter appen dices and backmatter called section blocks The section block governs such properties as the numbering of the chapters and sections I use the end of the frontmatter to print the table of contents Docbook does not have the equivalent of section blocks There is not a single element that contains the frontmatter the bodymatter or the backmatter Therefore I analysed the top level structure of a docbook document and divided the elements that may occur as top level elements into frontmatter elements bodymatter elements and backmatter ele ments When the first top level bodymatter element is seen the frontmatter is complete and the bodymatter starts Similarly for the backmatter For a book in Docbook the situation is rather clear The bodymatter starts with the first part chapter article or reference
64. to any such manual or work Any member of the public is a licensee and is addressed as you You accept the license if you copy modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law A modified version of the document means any work containing the docu ment or a portion of it either copied verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language A secondary section is a named appendix or a front matter section of the document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or au thors of the document to the document s overall subject or to related matters and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject Thus if the document is in part a textbook of mathematics a secondary section may 87 88 THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE not explain any mathematics The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters or of legal commercial philosophical ethical or political position regarding them The invariant sections are certain secondary sections whose titles are des ignated as being those of invariant sections in the notice that says that the document is released under this license If a section does not fit the above def inition of secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as invariant The document may contain zero invariant sections If the document does not iden tify any invariant sections
65. updated yet Adobe merely offers a set of generic euro fonts containing glyphs that do not really match any typeface at all From a typographical perspective this is a desperate workaround However lacking a matching euro symbol we do not have a choice The Adobe Euro fonts come in three flavors serif Euro Serif sans serif Euro Sans and condensed sans serif Euro Mono intended for use with monospaced fonts Each family consists of regular regular italic bold and bold italic fonts Instead of using a serif euro 1 http www adobe com type eurofont html 48 THE EURO CURRENCY SYMBOL that does not match our typeface we will use the sans serif design which has a more generic look that adheres to the shape of the reference design of the European Commission Granted this one does not match our typeface either but at least it does not pretend to do so Now that we are aware of the most common encoding pitfalls we inspect the afm files first before proceeding with the installation The Euro fonts put the euro symbol in all encoding positions When looking at the afm file we can see that the fonts use a font specific encoding and that the glyphs are labeled as Euro with a consecutive number appended to the name C 33 WX 750 N Euro 001 B 10 12 709 685 C 34 WX 750 N Euro 002 B 10 12 709 685 C 35 WX 750 N Euro 003 B 10 12 709 685 C 36 WX 750 N Euro 004 B 10 12 709 685 C 37 WX 750 N Euro 00
66. verfrissende optreden van Tenar en Cathelijne waren de leden vervolgens in een puike stemming om tijdens de borrel in het hotelcaf over van alles met elkaar te brainstormen Niet iedereen bleef over IEX bezig maar hier en daar werden toch nog TEX plannen gesmeed Ook tijdens de eenvoudige doch voedzame maaltijd in het restaurant van Haarhuis was het typesetten her en der nog onderwerp van gesprek maar in het algemeen ging de conversatie meer de richting op van vrije kunsten atletiek en liefde Toch was er ook nog gelegenheid voor een korte vergadering aan een tafeltje apart van de mensen die momenteel met de Maps bezig zijn Ja het werd erg laat maar er ging deze dag geen uur verloren community Siep Kroonenberg door Dilys Bronkhorst Erik Frambach geniet van Dilys Bronkhorst met Frans Goddijn een geslaagde NTG bijeenkomst Najaar 2003 community TEX user groups worldwide what s cooking Erik Frambach abstract South America no lugs were founded Africa no lugs were founded Other continents neither This article is based on a presentation given at the UK TUG meeting in Oxford in October 2002 It describes some current problems that TEX user groups face and it attempts to distill lessons learned and recommendations from almost 25 years of TEX user groups history keywords TEX user groups lugs problems volunteer work history Introduction During discussions by email and at
67. width textwidth 1 BOEK over het maken van boeken BOOK on making books H van Krimpen 1966 Najaar 2003 59 typografie Optisch uitvullen in de Maps Siep Kroonenberg In deze maps wordt voor het eerst gebruik gemaakt van op tisch uitvullen met behulp van protruding characters dat wil zeggen dat wordt gepoogd de rechterkantlijn er rechter uit te laten zien door tekens met horizontale uitsteeksels zoals onder andere afbreekstreepjes iets in de kantlijn te laten uitsteken Dit is een optie van pdf TEX die niet aanwezig is in een klassieke TEX Han Th Than gaat uitgebreid hierop in in zijn proefschrift Hans Hagen heeft er al eens over ge schreven in de Maps maar nu wordt het eindelijk ook in de Maps in praktijk gebracht althans in de meeste LaTEX stukken Om dit te aktiveren moet je deze optie eerst aanzetten pdfprotrudechars 1 Een waarde van 1 betekent aan maar doe het pas nadat de alinea in regels is verdeeld zodat als je om wat voor reden dan ook toch een dvi bestand wilt maken er geen tekstverloop optreedt Andere mogelijke waarden zijn o uit en 2 wel tekstverloop Je geeft per font aan hoever welke tekens in de linker of rechterkantlijn moeten uitsteken LalEX heeft een perfekt handvat hiervoor de derde parameter van het DeclareFontFamily commando of de zesde parameter van het DeclareFontShape commando Hier kun je al lerlei initialisatiecode kwijt Meestal staat daar niets DeclareF
68. zpeurit afm zpeurit tfm 1 http www adobe com type eurofont html 50 THE EURO CURRENCY SYMBOL afm2tfm zpeubt afm zpeubt tfm afm2tfm zpeubit afm zpeubit tfm We also need slanted versions of all upright fonts As slant factor we use the generic value 0 167 afm2tfm zpeur afm s afm2tfm zpeub afm s afm2tfm zpeurs afm s afm2tfm zpeubs afm s afm2tfm zpeurt afm s afm2tfm zpeubt afm s 0 167 zpeuro tfm 0 167 zpeubo tfm 0 167 zpeuros tfm 0 167 zpeubos tfm 0 167 zpeurot tfm 0 167 zpeubot tfm In addition to that we need a map file for dvips Map files for symbol fonts are simpler than those for text fonts because the fonts are not reencoded Therefore there will be no ReEncodeFont instruction and no encoding vector The first lines of peu map look like this zpeur _EuroSerif Regular lt zpeur pfb zpeuri EuroSerif Italic lt zpeuri pfb zpeub EuroSerif Bold lt zpeub pfb zpeubi EuroSerif BoldItalic lt zpeubi pfb zpeurs EuroSans Regular lt zpeurs pfb zpeuris EuroSans Italic lt zpeuris pfb zpeubs EuroSans Bold lt zpeubs pfb zpeubis EuroSans BoldItalic lt zpeubis pfb zpeurt EuroMono Regular lt zpeurt pfb zpeurit EuroMono Italic lt zpeurit pfb zpeubt EuroMono Bold lt zpeubt pfb zpeubit EuroMono BoldItalic lt zpeubit pfb We also need to add SlantFont instructions for all slanted shapes zpeuro EuroSerif Regular 0 167 SlantFont lt zpeur pfb zpeubo EuroSerif Bold 0 167 SlantFont lt
69. 0430bachotex web 20030503Radek_Anna jpg P20 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes overview pdf P21 http www gust org pl BachoTex 2002 P21 http www jaroslaw pl festiwal P21 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan russian html Najaar 2003 community 23 LaTex Toolbox Wybo Dekker wybo servalys nl abstract Nieuwe avonturen in TEX land keywords index rules tooltips uitvullen Tegen fraudeurs Sander van Geloven schreef Weet iemand hoe ik een hrulefill kan maken die iets hoger ligt eigenlijk precies in het midden van de hoogte van een gewone kleine letter Nu heb ik met hrulefill dit maar ik wil eigenlijk maar dan tot het einde van de regel dit Het is om te voorkomen dat iemand op de hardcopy nog tekst na het einde van de regel kan plaatsen Nu kreeg ik van Piet van Oostrum de volgende twee tips def mrulefill leavevmode leaders hbox hfill kernOpt Maar die resulteert in een onderbroken streepjeslijn die op gebouwd is uit een heleboel karakters De tweede tip def mrulefill leavevmode leaders hrule height 3pt depth 2pt hfill kern pt was precies wat ik wilde een ononderbroken lijn op halve X hoogter Nu heb ik dit nog aangepast tot def mrulefill leavevmode leaders hrule height 6ex depth 2pt hfill kern pt Dan is er nog een spatie tussen het einde van de regel met tekst en het begin van de lijn Verder heb ik ook de hoogt
70. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 go le EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP DeclareTextOrnament pmn 6 U pmnp m n 102 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 7 U pmnp m n 103 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 8 U pmnp m n 104 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 9 U pmnp m n 105 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 10 U pmnp m n 106 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 11 U pmnp m n 107 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 12 U pmnp m n 108 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 13 U pmnp m n 109 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 14 U pmnp m n 110 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 15 U pmnp m n 111 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 16 U pmnp m n 112 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 17 U pmnp m n 113 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 18 U pmnp m n 114 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 19 U pmnp m n 115 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 20 U pmnp m n 116 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 21 U pmnp m n 117 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 22 U pmnp m n 118 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 23 U pmnp m n 119 endinput As mentioned before Adobe Garamond features ornaments in the alternate text fonts requiring a complete font declaration In this case the definitions would look as follows DeclareTextOrnament pad 1 U pada m n 49 DeclareTextOrnament pad 2 U pada m n 50 DeclareTextOrname
71. 1s0 9660 filesystem used for data cp Roms The most important asset of the Fontname scheme is that it is the only formalized naming system widely used within the Tex community Given the large number of files required to integrate a given typeface into a Tex system installations without formal file naming would quickly get out of control So if the next couple of paragraphs should sound a bit cumbersome to you you are in good company Rest assured that after installing a few font families and watching your installation grow you will understand the benefits of this scheme In order to understand the basic principles of the Fontname scheme see the file fontname dvi for an overview as well as excerpts from various map files Browse the map files of individual vendors for the complete listings When us ing the latinfamily macro strict adherence to the scheme is required If you write a custom fontinst file using lower level commands the naming is techni cally up to you It is still a good idea to stick to the naming system where possi ble Ifa given typeface is not included in the map file for the respective foundry take the foundry code from supplier map and the code of the typeface from typeface map If the typeface is not listed at all you will need to create a new code This should be an unused one if possible Try handling weight variant and encoding codes as strictly as possible Foundry and typeface codes may be handled more liberally
72. 33 xml 34 Simon Pepping is a very powerful and flexible environment with much customization possibilities using setupTABLE commands A special feature of this table model is that rows columns and cells can be configured both before and after their content has been given at any time before the end of table eTABLE command Because ConTEXt s natural tables have much similarities to CALS tables the mapping is in principle very easy a row corresponds to TR an entry to TD colspec elements can be mapped to setupTABLE commands There are three main complications a The top bottom left and right frames of a CALS table are determined by the frame attribute of the table the rowsep and colsep attributes of the correspond ing rows and cells should be ignored a CALS tables can have multiple tgroup elements each with their own number of columns and their own alignment and frame settings colspec elements o Each tgroup may have its own thead and tfoot elements which may contain their own colspec elements These requirements have led to the following model The table element generates a ConTEXt table i e the table float using the placetable command Each tgroup element generates its own TABLE environment i e the actual table The table is not openend by the start tag of the table because at that moment the title is not yet known Instead it is opened by the start tag of the first tgroup command XMLDBopentable which co
73. 5 B 10 12 709 685 C 38 WX 750 N Euro 006 B 10 12 709 685 C 39 WX 750 N Euro 007 B 10 12 709 685 C 40 WX 750 N Euro 008 B 10 12 709 685 C 41 WX 750 N Euro 009 B 10 12 709 685 On further inspection we find two additional glyphs There is a glyph labeled as Euro in slot 128 as well as an uncoded glyph labeled unizoac C 128 WX 750 N Euro B 10 12 709 685 C 1 WX 750 N uni20AC B 10 12 709 685 The number 204c is 8364 in hexadecimal This is the encoding position of the euro symbol in Unicode encoding hence the string unizoac If nothing else one thing is for sure someone was trying to make sure that every application out there would be able to access that euro symbol Fortunately this covers our situation as well We need a glyph that is both properly encoded and labeled as Euro the encoding position does not matter since we will include it in a virtual font using a different encoding anyway The one in slot 128 fits our needs perfectly In practice this means that we can simply add the file name to the input file list of an installfont command when creating Ts1 encoded virtual fonts with fontinst This time no reencoding or renaming is required The relevant section of our fontinst file for Sabon would look as follows install font install font install font install font install font install font psbr8c psbro8c psbri8c psbb8c psbbo8c ps
74. 8r unsetcaps pmnriw7a pmnri8x latin ot1j 011 pmnw m it instal1 font pmnsiw90 pmnsi8r unsetcaps pmnsiw7a pmnsi8x latin ot1j 011 pmnw sb it endinstall fonts Note that using a setup including or1 encoding for one font family only will require switching the encoding explicitly when selecting the swash fonts fontencoding OT1 font fami ly pmnw select font The pmnw family as generated by fontinst will only cover two shapes in either case Since fontinst does not support family substitutions we cannot take the missing shapes from pmnj in the fontinst file We have to edit the respective font definition file t1pmnw fd after running fontinst For T encoding it should look as follows ProvidesFile t1pmnw fd DeclareFontFamily T1 pmnw DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw m n lt gt ssub pmnj m n DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw m sc lt gt ssub pmnj m sc DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw m sl lt gt ssub pmnj m it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw m it lt gt pmnriw9d DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw m si lt gt ssub pmnj m si DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw sb n lt gt ssub pmnj sb n 72 EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw sb sc lt gt ssub pmnj sb sc DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw sb s1 lt gt ssub pmnj sb it DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw sb it lt gt pmnsiw9d DeclareFontShape T1 pmnw sb
75. 97 WX 479 N Asmall B 19 4 460 451 C 98 WX 438 N Bsmall B 31 4 395 434 C 99 WX 500 N Csmall B 37 12 459 443 The situation is similar for lining and hanging old style figures The follow ing lines are taken from mjnr8a afm and mjnr8x afm respectively C 48 WX 469 N zero B 37 12 432 627 C 49 WX 469 None B 109 5 356 625 C 50 WX 469 N two B 44 0 397 627 C 48 WX 469 N zerooldstyle B 39 0 431 387 C 49 WX 271 N oneoldstyle B 44 5 229 405 C 50 WX 396 N twooldstyle B 37 0 356 415 In practice this means that adding expert fonts to the basic font set amounts to little more than adding them to the input file list of installfont in most cases Still some additional steps are required Fortunately all we need to do in order to make optical small caps and hanging figures readily available is using dedicated encoding vectors provided by fontinst These encoding vectors refer ence the glyphs by names corresponding to those found in expert fonts thus allowing us to pick optical small caps and hanging figures at will With that in mind we can get down to business Our fontinst file begins with a typical header 1 5 input fontinst sty substitutesilent bx b substitutesilent sc n setint smallcapsscale 720 setint slant 167 Unfortunately Monotype Janson provides small caps for the regular weight only Hence we have to make do with mechanical small caps for
76. D 1 eTD bTD ffi eTD bTD tfxx AE OE ae oe eTD bTD c C eTD bTD eTD eTR bTR bTD a eTD bTD e eTD bTD i eTD bTD o eTD bTD u eTD bTD a eTD bTD e eTD bTD i eTD bTD o eTD bTD u eTD Najaar 2003 bTD bTD bTR bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTR bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD bTD eTABLE dagger eTD char167 eTD eTR a eTD fe eTD i eTD o eTD u eTD a eTD e eTD i eTD o eTD u eTD eTD eTD eTR 1 eTD 2 eTD 3 eTD 4 eTD 5 eTD 6 eTD 7 eTD 8 eTD 9 eTD eTD eTD eTD eTR applications 55 applications The table with part of the lower case letters amp k b d c e 8 1 m n Z i y v u t pasjes x bTABLE setupTABLE c 1 2 width 2 625em setupTABLE c 3 4 5 width 5 25em bTR bTD amp eTD bTD nr 2 b eTD bTD k eTD bTD nr 2 d eTD bTD nr 3 e eTD eTR bTR bTD c c eTD bTD c eTD eTR bTR bTD g eTD 56 bTD nr 2 1 eTD bTD nr 2 m eTD bTD nr 2 n eTD eTR bTR bTD z eTD bTD i eTD eTR bTR bTD y eTD bTD nr 2 v eTD bTD nr 2 u eTD bTD nr 2 t eTD bTD nr 3 tfx pasjes eTD eTR bTR bTD x eTD eTR eTABLE Willi Egger MAPS Drawing a type case
77. EP 4 INSTALLING THE FILES We install all font metrics afm Type1 font outlines pfb Tex font metrics tfm virtual fonts vf and font defini tion files fd into the local Tex tree The remaining files are not required anymore and may be deleted STEP 5 CREATING MAP FILES The fonts are now set up for Tex and Latex but not for pvr and Ppr drivers which are configured separately We create map files for dvips pdftex and if a version of xdvi with native support for Post script fonts is available for xdvi We install the map files and add them to the applications configuration files STEP 6 UPDATING THE HASH TABLES Finally we run texhash to update the file hash tables used by the kpathsea search library 1 1 Renaming the files Users unfamiliar with fontinst tend to moan when introduced to the Fontname scheme for the first time This file naming standard which is also known by the name of its creator as the Karl Berry scheme is often regarded as overly 10 THE BASICS complicated cumbersome unclear and unmanageable And indeed it will ap pear somewhat cumbersome to anyone working with an operating system that does not impose silly limits on the lengths of file names All of that is not the fault of its creator however but an inevitable result of the historical need to en code a complete font designation in a string of eight characters in order to cope with the limitations of the pos filesystem as well as the
78. GUI ConTEXt macros PERL and Ruby scripts XML dataflows a watched folder system collection of Ruby modules classes and applications Impressive Hyperref package Martin Schr der A bit fast to my taste he summarized the possibilities of this package written by Sebastian Rahtz in the late nineties I missed examples I pity that he did not mention that PS pictures should separately be converted to PDF or PNG as he told me later privately So older scripts to be enriched by hyperrefs should also be adapted with respect to markup and the accompanying PostScript pictures should be transformed into PDF or PNG as well It is just a pity that I could not understand Grzegorz lecture Towards better quality of pdf files which I guess is related to the above and to the work I started last year although I took the quality for granted to Hans about this and about a lot more 20 By the way Jerzy s complaint is that TEX is not user friendly 21 As far as I understand ConTgXt does support creation of PS pictures via MetaPost and inclusion of these in PDF e paper on the fly 22 Yes yes I agree I should have talked to him this is one of the might have beens I realized too late Equally well another missed opportunity I should have talked to my friend Radek about his usage of the Titanium Mac simply because I m about to buy a G4 Mac either the Quicksilver or the Titanium notebook I also would have liked to ask h
79. Garamond BoldItalic gdbi____ pfb padbi8a pfb 61 fonts When you want to use a newly acquired font it is import ant to always check first if ready made support is available to save you a lot of work For many Type 1 fonts this is the case and it can be found on CTAN 3 in the direct ory fonts psfonts Adobe Garamond support has been written by Sebastian Rahtz and is available on CTAN in the directory fonts psfonts adobe agaramon All that is needed now are only two things First the actual font files need to be renamed according to Karl Berry s Fontname scheme Second all files need to be copied to the correct spot in the standard TEX directory tree All of this is nicely documented by Philipp Lehman 7 The renaming bit is easy in this case as the fonts are actually listed literally in Karl Berry s Fontname 2 In the current version which dates from May 2003 they are listed on page 37 But the best way to look for them is by performing a file contents search on all files with file extension map in the fontname subdirectory of your TEXMF tree The files as supplied by Adobe should be renamed according to table 1 We only need the actual font data files with file extension pb in this case Note that the font name we will use in TEX or LaTpx later is pad Then the files should be copied to the proper place But what is that proper place Actually that is pretty straightforward First of all all locally added TEX things
80. MAPS NUMMER 29 e NAJAAR 2003 REDAKTIE Wybo Dekker waarnemend hoofdredakteur Frans Goddijn Taco Hoekwater Siep Kroonenberg Piet van Oostrum NIG NEDERLANDSTALIGE TEX GEBRUIKERSGROEP NEDERLANDSTALIGE TEX GEBRUIKERSGROEP Voorzitter Hans Hagen pragma wxs nl Secretaris Willi Egger w egger boede nl Penningmeester Wybo Dekker wybo servalys nl Bestuursleden Erik Frambach erik frambach planet nl Frans Goddijn frans goddijn com Karel Wesseling k h wesseling planet nl Postadres Nederlandstalige TEX Gebruikersgroep Maasstraat 2 5836 BB Sambeek Postgiro 1306238 t n v NTG Deil SWIFT BIC code ING BNL 2A IBAN code NLOSPSTB0001306238 E mail bestuur ntg ntg nl E mail maps redaktie maps ntg nl www www ntg nl Copyright 2003 NTG De Nederlandstalige TX Gebruikersgroep NTG is een vereniging die tot doel heeft de kennis en het gebruik van TEX te bevorderen De NTG fungeert als een forum voor nieuwe ontwikkelingen met betrekking tot computergebaseerde document opmaak in het algemeen en de ontwikkeling van TEX and friends in het bijzonder De doelstellingen probeert de NTG te realiseren door onder meer het uitwisselen van informatie het orga niseren van conferenties en symposia met betrekking tot TEX en daarmee verwante pro grammatuur De NTG biedt haar leden ondermeer Tweemaal per jaar een NTG bijeenkomst Het NTG tijdschrift MAPS De IEX Live distributie op DVD CDR
81. OM inclusief de complete CTAN software archieven Verschillende discussielijsten mailing lists over TEX gerelateerde onderwerpen zowel voor beginners als gevorderden algemeen en specialistisch De FTP server ftp ntg nl waarop vele honderden megabytes aan algemeen te gebruiken TEX producten staan De www server www ntg nl waarop algemene informatie staat over de NTG bijeenkomsten publicaties en links naar andere TEX sites Korting op buitenlandse TEX conferenties en cursussen en op het lidmaatschap van andere IEX gebruikersgroepen Lid worden kan door overmaking van de verschuldigde contributie naar de NTG giro zie links vermeld IBAN zowel als SwIFT BIC code en selecteer shared cost Daarnaast dient via www ntg nl een informatieformulier te worden ingevuld Zonodig kan ook een papie ren formulier bij het secretariaat worden opgevraagd De contributie bedraagt 40 voor studenten geldt een tarief van 20 Dit geeft alle lidmaatschapsvoordelen maar geen stemrecht Een bewijs van inschrijving is vereist Een gecombineerd NTG TUG lidmaatschap levert een korting van 10 op beide contributies op De prijs in euro s wordt bepaald door de dollarkoers aan het begin van het jaar De ongekorte TUG contributie is momenteel 65 MAPS bijdragen kunt u opsturen naar maps ntg nl bij voorkeur in LaTEX of ConTEXt formaat Bijdragen op alle niveaus van expertise zijn welkom Productie De
82. PS Toolbox begin theindex item textit ambitus 1 item textit ambitus 1 end theindex met als gevolg dat de indexterm ambitus tweemaal in de index komt Weet iemand een manier om dit te vermijden Er wordt in de LC van alles gezegd over protecten van com mando s binnen voetnoten maar wat ik protect footnote index of textit het effect is hetzelfde twee index items in plaats van n Johannes Braams antwoordde Een manier om het te vermijden weet ik zo 1 2 3 niet Wel kan ik het verklaren wellicht dat dat een clue levert De twee items worden door makeindex als verschillend gezien vanwege de spaties Die spaties worden veroorzaakt door het protect ed commando mechanisme van de huidige LaTEX die die zorgt er namelijk voor dat het commando index expandeert naar index waarbij de een spatie voorstelt In de meeste gevallen zijn die spaties irrele vant en ziet LalEX de volgende keer weer het commando index expandeert naar index en dan hebben we twee spaties tussen index en zijn argument Piet van Oostrum schreef Dit is een oud probleem Zie LaTEX bug 1435 Gevolgd door een citaat van dat LaTEX bug rapport dat voor mij niet te volgen was dus dat laat ik maar even weg Maar Piet kwam ook met een minder obscure oplossing Gebruik footnote sty en genereer de voetnoot met begin footnote index ambitus textit ambitus Een voetnoot met een indexterm end footnote Of als alternatief red
83. Shape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape endinput A GR GR IGA GR OR OO OO OO OO OO OR OR H pmn0 m pmn0 m pmn0 pmn0 m pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 pmn0 n lt sc lt m s1 lt it lt sb n sb sc lt sb s1 lt sb it lt b n b sc lt b sl lt b it lt eb n eb sc lt eb s1 lt eb it lt bx n bx sc lt bx s1 lt bx it lt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt For the pmn1 family ProvidesFile tslpmn1 DeclareFontFamily TS1 pmn DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape ANNANANANANANANAN fd 1 pmn1 m n lt gt pmn1 m sc lt gt pmn1 m s1 lt gt pmn1 m it lt gt pmn1 sb n lt gt pmn1 sb sc lt gt pmn1 sb s1 lt gt pmn1 sb it lt gt pmn1 b n lt gt pmn1 b sc lt gt pmn1 b s1 lt gt ssub ssub ssub ss
84. Siep Kroonenberg 60 Installing fonts in LaTeX a user s experience Ferdy Hanssen 61 The Font Installation Guide Philipp Lehman 65 Najaar 2003 Redactioneel Wybo Dekker wybo servalys nl Voor u ligt het negenentwintigste nummer van de MAPS Het is het eerste nummer van dit jaar en het zal ook het enige nummer blijven De oorzaak hiervan is dat binnen de redactie en met name bij de hoofdredacteur Johannes Braams te weinig tijd beschikbaar was om de leden u dus achter de vodden te zitten en u te bewegen tot het opschrij ven van een verhaal over een van de vele leuke en voor anderen interesssante dingen die u met IEX doet Johannes Braams heeft daarom besloten zijn functie terug te geven en het bestuur heeft Niels Moes bereid gevonden om zijn taak over te nemen Niels is echter nog druk bezig met het schrijven van zijn proefschrift en zal daarom pas over en kele maanden zijn functie kunnen gaan uitoefenen Hij zal de hoofdredacteur voor de voorjaars MAPS van 2004 wor den Tegenover die niet verschenen MAPS staat dat we u dit jaar nog zullen verblijden de TgXlive distributie 2003 die deze keer ook de CTAN dump bevat en uit twee cdroms en een dvd bestaat en met een prachtig handzaam boekje van de hand van Hans Hagen en Willi Egger dat een overzicht geeft van alle outline fonts die op de nieuwe IEXlive dis tributie beschikbaar komen Verder heeft het bestuur Ernst van der Storm bereid ge vonden de Maps redactie te versterken
85. T1 version of the Computer Modern fonts in Postscript format Such fonts are included in two independent packages P ter Szab s Tt2001 as well as Vladimir Volovich s more recent cM super package Both packages include Postscript fonts which are traced and post processed conversions of their Metafont counterparts Unless you know that a specific font you need is provided by the Tt2001 package only go with the more advanced cm super package which will bring you as close to a real solution as you can possibly get when using free versions of the European Computer Modern fonts Note however that it is a rather large download Since it includes a huge number of fonts the compressed package is about 64 MB in size The cm super fonts use Adobe Standard as their native encoding but the glyph set provided by these fonts includes Cyrillic letters as well In addition to T1 and Ts1 cM super supports the Cyrillic encodings 12a T2B T2C and x2 See the package documentation for installation instructions and answers to the most frequently asked questions Here is a version of our style file for use in conjunction with cM super NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage sabon 2002 04 17 v1 0 Adobe Sabon with CM Super RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp RequirePackage typelec renewcommand rmdefault psb endinput Recently yet another new implementation of Computer Modern has been re 1 http www ctan org tex archi
86. U peu bx it lt gt ssub peu b it endinput For Euro Sans upeus fd ProvidesFile upeus fd DeclareFontFami ly U peus DeclareFontShape U peus m n lt gt zpeurs DeclareFontShape U peus m sc lt gt ssub peus m n DeclareFontShape U peus m s1 lt gt zpeuros DeclareFontShape U peus m it lt gt zpeuris DeclareFontShape U peus b n lt gt zpeubs DeclareFontShape U peus b sc lt gt ssub peus b n DeclareFontShape U peus b sl lt gt zpeubos DeclareFontShape U peus b it lt gt zpeubis DeclareFontShape U peus bx n lt gt ssub peus b n DeclareFontShape U peus bx sc lt gt ssub peus b n DeclareFontShape U peus bx s1 lt gt ssub peus b s1 DeclareFontShape U peus bx it lt gt ssub peus b it endinput And for Euro Mono upeut fd ProvidesFile upeut fd DeclareFontFamily U peut DeclareFontShape U peut m n lt gt zpeurt DeclareFontShape U peut m sc lt gt ssub peut m n DeclareFontShape U peut m s1 lt gt zpeurot DeclareFontShape U peut m it lt gt zpeurit DeclareFontShape U peut b n lt gt zpeubt DeclareFontShape U peut b sc lt gt ssub peut b n DeclareFontShape U peut b sl lt gt zpeubot DeclareFontShape U peut
87. aTeX2e ProvidesPackage sabon 2002 04 17 v1 0 Adobe Sabon 1 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex doc fntguide pdf anu kw eornNau Pk WN He 20 THE BASICS RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp renewcommand rmdefault psb endinput Essentially we redefine rmdef ault in order to use Sabon as the default roman typeface for the whole document In addition to that we load the fontenc package and switch to T1 encoding which is more appropriate for Postscript fonts than the or1 encoding used by default We also load the text comp package which provides a user interface for the symbols found in Ts1 encoding This will allow us to access symbols such as copyright or registered If the textcomp package is used in conjunction with inputenc it is even possible to enter most of these symbols directly in a Latex file There is one thing we have to keep in mind when switching to T1 encod ing The default encoding is a global setting that applies to all text fonts used in a Latex file unless the encoding is reset explicitly using the NFss macro fontencoding It will affect the font family defined as rmdefault but also the families set up as sfdefault and ttdefault By default these are Com puter Modern Sans Serif cmss and Computer Modern Typewriter cmtt Us ing these fonts in conjuction with T1 encoding will pose some problems most European Tex users are already well familiar with It is
88. all caps To work around this problem we will have to redefine a few NFss macros But first of all we will add a macro for explicit switching to italic small caps newcommand sidefault si Note that the Nrss does not use fixed shape codes like it and sc for the italic and the small caps shape but rather macros like itdefault and scdefault We will handle italic small caps in a similar way by defining sidefault which defaults to si Now let s define sishape for explicit switching to italic small caps DeclareRobustCommand sishape not math alphabet sishape rel ax fontshape sidefault selectfont While we are able to typeset italic small caps by selecting them explicitly macros like itshape and scshape will simply ignore the new shape Let s redefine these macros to make them take advantage of italic small caps transparently In order to do so we need a macro that will merge properties of the shape axis thereby allowing us to treat italics and small caps as if they were not on the same axis newcommand exfs merge shape 3 edef exfs tempa 1 edef exfs tempb 2 ifx f shape exfs tempb expandafter ifx csname f encoding f family f series 3 endcsname rel ax else edef exfs tempa 3 fi fi fontshape exfs tempa select font This macro will switch to the font shape given as the first argument unless the current shape is identical to the one indicated by the second argument In this case it
89. an org 4 Emigre web site http www emigre com 5 A Hoenig TEX unbound LaTeX amp TEX Strategies for Fonts Graphics amp More Oxford University Press 1998 ISBN 0 19 509685 1 6 A Jeffrey and R McDonnell fontinst font installation software for TEX June 1998 Latest edition available on line at http www ctan org tex archive fonts utilities fontinst doc manual fontinst ps 7 P Lehman The font installation guide Aug 2003 Latest edition available on line at http www ctan org tex archive info Typelfonts fontinstallationguide pdf MAPS Philipp Lehman schreef bijgaande handleiding voor het installeren van Postscript Type 1 fonts Fontinstallatie zal nooit een fluitje van een cent worden maar met deze handleiding bij de hand en de documenten die erin worden aanbevolen is het in elk geval niet langer een hachelijk avontuur voor helderzienden Wie de aangegeven stappen volgt kan niet verdwalen Lehmans handleiding is bovendien een lust voor het oog fraai van functionele opzet en ook daarom drukken we het graag af in deze MAPS The Font Installation Guide PHILIPP LEHMAN AUGUST 2003 The Font Installation Guide Using Postscript fonts to their full potential with Latex PHILIPP LEHMAN VERSION 1 23 Copyright 2002 2003 Philipp Lehman lehman gmx net Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the cnu Free Documentation License version 1
90. and yph pilcrow yph baht yph numero yph discount yph estimated yph openbullet yph servicemark yph quillbracketleft yph quillbracketright yph copyleft yph circledP yph referencemark yph radical yph euro g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g While this may seem like a long list it is not unusual when installing fonts not specifically designed for Tex You will get the most common symbols such as currency signs and other frequently used symbols and chances are that you are not going to miss the lacking ones If you want to learn more about these encodings simply run fontinst s encoding vectors through latex to get a DVI file containing a commented listing of all the glyphs latex 8r etx latex otl etx latex tl etx latex tsl etx After fontinst is finished we run all property list files p1 through pltotf to create Tex font metric files tfm and all virtual property list files vp1 files through vptovf to create virtual fonts vf When using the Bash shell this can be done as follows for file in pl do pltotf file done for file in vpl do vptovf file done The generation of Tex font metrics virtual fonts and font definition files is now complete 1 3 Installing the files The Tetex distribution supports a total of three Tex trees a global one a local one and a user tree The global tree is
91. and issue a warning if not 94 96 We also typeset a mark 97 to facilitate debugging in this case If it has been declared we expand and parse the declaration 100 102 switch fonts and typeset the ornament 103 We use a group to keep the font change local v1 6 The style file The style file for Minion is similar to the ones suggested in section 111 3 and v 5 The only difference is the declaration of the text ornaments This is the first part of minion sty NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage minion 2003 03 25 v1 0 Adobe Minion RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp RequirePackage nfssext DeclareOption oldstyle renewcommand rmdefault pmnj DeclareOption lining renewcommand rmdefault pmnx ExecuteOptions oldstyle ProcessOptions When declaring the text ornaments we take the encoding slot numbers from the respective afm file C 97 WX 885 N ornament B 50 65 835 744 N C 98 WX 1036 N ornament2 B 50 4 986 672 C 99 WX 1066 N ornament3 B 50 106 1016 745 N N C 100 WX 866 N ornament4 B 50 98 816 534 C 101 WX 390 N ornament5 B 50 86 341 550 We add a declaration for each ornament DeclareTextOrnament pmn 1 U m n 9 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 2 U m n 9 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 3 U pmnp m n 9 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 4 U m n 1 DeclareTextOrnament pmn 5 U m n 1 15 16 17 18
92. ant 1 latex 2 Id ethanol tex v 1 3 2003 01 29 17 24 00 rsmith Exp I http autotrace sourceforge net Najaar 2003 toepassing O OND BPW de Op de DL DL BL DL R DL Roland Smith LaTeX sourcecode file for making 105x74 stickers for chemicals Suited for containers up to 50 liters Written by R F Smith lt rsmith xs4all nl gt in 2003 and placed in the public domain volgende regels worden de macro s gedefinieerd die de inhoud van de labels bepalen Te beginnen met de handelsnaam de gevaarlijke stoffen en eventuele codenum mers 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Contents of the sticker change these to suit you Chemname should contain the trade name for the substance newcommand Chemname Ethanol Contains describes the main ingredient newcommand Contains Bevat ethanol 5 methanol Codenumber is for the code your organization has given this material if any You can leave it empty newcommand Codenumber 1322 501 33801 Vervolgens kunnen er maximaal twee symbolen met bijbehorende betekenis opgeno men worden Het zou waarschijnlijk eleganter zijn om macro s te defini ren die een sym bool en de bijbehorende tekst combineren Maar in het opgenomen overzicht is duidelijk genoeg te zien welke combinaties gebruikt moeten worden 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Possibilities for Upper LowerS
93. ap files as a way of recording all encoding and shape modifications applied to the font metrics during the installation so that they can be repeated for the font outlines when the final Postscript file is displayed or printed This information is required for the raw fonts only because all the information concerning the virtual fonts is contained in the virtual font files When using pvr or PDF as the final output format the division of labor be tween the various tools involved differs since pdftex combines the roles of Tex and dvips while pv1 viewers deal with both the virtual fonts and the render ing of the font outlines on screen The principle however remains the same Therefore pdftex and xdvi require map files as well TUTORIAL III OPTICAL SMALL CAPS AND HANGING FIGURES When choosing a new typeface bear in mind that optical small caps and hang ing figures are not available for all commercial Postscript fonts If they are available for a certain typeface they are usually provided separately either in a SC amp OSF or in an expert font package We will deal with the former case in this tutorial the latter will be discussed in tutorial v Suppose we have acquired the Sabon sc amp osf package to complement our base install of Sabon This pack age provides four additional fonts a regular sc amp osr an italic osr a bold osr and a bold italic osr font These fonts will provide us with hanging figures for all shapes in both weigh
94. apes The black weight will be mapped to the eb series of the nrss After finishing T1 encoding we continue with Ts1 Our setup for Ts1 encoding does not differ from tutorial v either install font install font install font install font pmnr9c pmnr8r pmnr8x textcomp ts1 TS1 pmnx m pmnri 9c pmnri8r pmnri8x textcomp ts1 TS1 pmnx pmns9c pmns8r pmns8x textcomp ts1 TS1 pmnx s n H b pmnsi9c pmnsi8r pmnsi8x textcomp ts1 TS1 pmnx H H b tht ith instal font pmnb9c pmnb8r pmnb8x textcomp ts1 TS1 pmnx b instal font pmnbi 9c pmnbi8r pmnbi8x textcomp ts1 TS1 pmnx instal font pmnc9c pmnc8r pmnc8x textcomp ts1 TS1 pmnx e endinstallfonts m i n sb n b it n The pmnx family is now complete We continue with pmnj which will feature hanging figures by default installfonts installfamily T1 pmnj instal font pmnr9d pmnr8r pmnr8x latin t1j T1 pmnj m n instal font pmnri9d pmnri8r pmnri8x latin t1j T1 pmnj m it To make hanging figures the default throughout the pmnj family we employ the encoding file t1j etx Other than that the setup of the upright and italic shapes does not differ from pmnx install font pmnrc9d kernoff pmnr8r pmnr8x kernon glyphoff pmnrc8r glyphon resetosf resetsc latinsc t1cj T1 pmnj m sc 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
95. asic fontinst file As usual our file begins with a typical header setting up some common font substitutions 2 3 While the Janson expert package provides optical small caps for the regular weight the bold expert fonts do not contain optical small 55 Row Ne 56 EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP caps For the bold series we have to make do with mechanical small caps The latinfamily macro will take care of that automatically All we need to do is define a scale factor of 0 72 4 input fontinst sty substitutesilent bx b substitutesilent sc n setint smallcapsscale 720 In the third tutorial we have incorporated lining and hanging figures by creat ing two font families a family with the basic three character font family name lining figures and a second family featuring hanging figures with the letter j appended to the font family name The character j is the Fontname code for hanging figures In this tutorial we need an additional code the letter x indicating a font featuring expert glyphs When installing expert sets with the latinfamily macro we use these family names to instruct fontinst that we have an expert set at hand and that we want it to create a font family featur ing expert glyphs with lining figures 5 plus a second family featuring expert glyphs with hanging figures 6 latinfamily mjnx latinfamily mjnj bye Please note that appending x and j to the font family name works for expert
96. at one would expect when working with a high level markup language like Latex When taking a closer look at the pfb and afm files we can see that the fonts in fact contain two euro symbols One of them is uncoded slot 1 and labeled as Euro C 1 WX 556 N Euro B 6 12 513 697 The other one is found in encoding slot 168 that is it is encoded as the currency symbol and named accordingly ia iel ags To verify that we have to take a look at the pfb files in a font viewer or a font editor Since the euro symbol is both ies gt agal 2 185 encoded and labeled just like a currency symbol there is i no way to tell the difference by looking at the afm file only 199 _ 200 C 168 WX 556 N currency B 6 12 513 697 N ANU ek WN eH EURO SYMBOL TAKEN FROM EXTERNAL SYMBOL FONT 47 If we want a readily available euro symbol and one that is available as such we have two options in this case Either we reencode the font and assign the uncoded euro symbol to a valid encoding position or we use the already en coded euro symbol found in the slot of the currency symbol and move it to the proper encoding position The former case was already discussed above let s now investigate the latter The best way to move the glyph to a different slot is resetting it when creat ing the Ts1 encoded virtual font We use an approach that is functionally equiv alent to the way we have reset the hang
97. at we de liberately chose provocative expressions and that they do not nessecarily represent our view on the issue They are primarily meant to evoke discussions 1 There is no good definition of a lug There are no cri teria for becoming a formal lug Or an informal lug whatever that is 2 Vision and mission of lugs are poorly developed Most if not all lugs have no long term strategy which makes them vulnerable to lots of problems 3 The model of user groups based on a common country or language no longer suffices 4 Information and expertise is no longer hard to find be cause of the Internet Therefore lugs have to find new reas ons for being A new lug model is needed MAPS TEX user groups worldwide what s cooking 5 Most lugs are clueless when it comes to promoting TEX or even themselves This is a threat for the entire TEX com munity 6 Lugs should be more involved in the process of defining and implementing a successor to TEX and accompanying software 7 Inter lug communication depends only on a few per sons who meet only a few times a year Email communic ation among lugs is subminimal Joint projects could help to improve this 8 Intra lug communication should be improved Sending a cd rom and a journal and organizing one or two meetings a year is not enough Members will not become involved which is why it s hard to find volunteers Najaar 2003 community 9 Lugs should
98. atin t1 T1 psb b n psbbc8t psbb8r latin t1c T1 psb b s1 it 1 sc m m Optical small caps are available for the regular weight only For the bold series we have to make do with faked small caps so we use the encoding file tic etx here 26 The remaining lines for T1 encoding do not require any adjustments installfont psbbo8t psbbo8r latin t1 T1 psb b s1 instal font psbbi8t psbbi8r latin t1 T1 psb b it That s it for T1 encoding While Ts1 is primarily intended for symbols comple menting 71 it includes hanging figures as well Since the only way to use them is loading the textcomp package and typing rather cumbersome text commands like textzerooldstyle it is not very useful to have them in Ts1 Our psbj family will make them the default figures anyway so that they are readily avail able But we are being picky We have put down some hard cold cash for the Sabon sc amp OsF package and we want to make the most of it Let s see how we can put hanging figures in TS1 psb as well As mentioned above the problem here is that the osr fonts use regular glyph names for the hanging figures while fontinst s Ts1 encoding vector references them by oldstyle names Hence we have to turn regular figures which are in fact hanging figures not encoded as such into hanging figures To do that we need an additional resource pro vided by fontinst the metric file resetosf mtx
99. ave been shipping with most Tex distributions ever since While these fonts work fine for Postscript and Ppr files they are not suitable for tasks re quiring letters not found in the English alphabet because their glyph base is still restricted to oT1 encoding J rg Knappen s European Computer Modern fonts address this issue by providing a more comprehensive set of glyphs but they have in turn been subject to the limitations of Metafont In the following I will briefly introduce several solutions which try to address these problems Most of them are trade offs in one way or another Tables 1 and 2 try to provide an overview of the major design variations over the Computer Modern theme along with their implementations The tables are by no means exhaustive there are even more fonts derived from the original Computer Modern typefaces To work around the hyphenation problem of or1 encoding while sticking to the original Computer Modern fonts there is a choice of two packages on CTAN which provide T1 encoded virtual fonts based on the original Computer Modern family of fonts the AE and the ze fonts The az fonts are built on top of Computer Modern exclusively but unfortunately they lack almost a dozen T1 characters including the French double and single guillemets which makes their default setup unsuitable for all French and a lot of German texts For Com puter Modern Typewriter the situation is even worse There is a supplemental package calle
100. bbi8c sbr8r zpeurs textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m n psbro8r zpeuros textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m psbri8r zpeuris textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m p 1 psbb8r zpeubs textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b n s it psbbo8r zpeubos textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b s psbbi8r zpeubis textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b WG it H H H H H H Since the Adobe Euro fonts are non standard their naming is non standard as well We will discuss that in more detail below Before running this file we need to copy the properly named afm files of the Adobe Euro fonts to the working directory so that fontinst will find them For the euro glyph to be available later the Euro fonts need to be installed in the usual way so that Tex as well as pdftex dvips and xdvi are able to use them Because the above fontinst file depends EURO SYMBOL TAKEN FROM EXTERNAL SYMBOL FONT 49 on this installation it makes sense to do it first Since the installation of symbol fonts differs from that of regular text fonts we will take a look at the required steps The Euro font package will provide us with the following set of files Jl afm li afm _1b afm _lbi__ afm _1 inf li inf _1b inf _lbi___ inf _1 pfb li pfb _1b pfb _1bi___ pfb 1l pfm _li pfm _1b pfm _lbi____ pfm _2 afm _2i afm _2b afm _2bi____ afm 2 inf 2i inf _2b inf 2bi___ inf 2 pfb 2i pfb _2b pfb _2bi___ pfb a2 pfm _2i pfm _2b pfm _2bi___ pfm 3 a
101. berg CSTUG This also partially explains why there are so few in North America The oldest lug TUG resides there and by nature TEX is English language oriented Nevertheless the vastness of the continent could have encouraged more local groups to start their own activ ities In Asia TRX seems to be much less known than in the western world Although typesetting eastern languages with TEX is possible it s hardly as easy as typesetting west ern Latin based languages There may also be a cultural barrier here South America and Africa in fact all contin ents on the southern hemisphere lack lugs We can only speculate on the reasons for this Ups and downs Many lugs have had and or are having their share of prob lems but there are also successes to celebrate In this sec tion we will list some of them Internal problems Running a lug is not a trivial task Many things can go wrong Some of the problems that have occurred are Constitutional problems bylaws and articles may prove to be extremely limiting or paralysing under difficult or un 1978 IEX final version released 1980 TUG founded 1987 UK TUG founded 1988 NTG founded GUTenberg founded 1989 DANTE e V founded 1992 GUST founded 1997 19 lugs 2002 25 lugs Table 1 Highlights in user groups history MAPS TEX user groups worldwide what s cooking foreseen circumstances E g constitutions may require a certain har
102. bles on the following pages are intended to give an idea of how the codes of the Fontname scheme relate to those used by Latex s font selection scheme Nrss The Fontname codes are what we use when renaming the font files during the installation while the Nrss codes are what we need when select ing a certain font under Latex later Sticking to the Nrss codes listed below is not a technical requirement for a functional font installation When using the latinfamily macro fontinst will indeed use these Nrss codes When employing low level fontinst commands however the Nrss font declaration is controlled by the last five arguments of the installfont command In the ory we could use an arbitrary code and the nrss would handle that just fine It is still highly recommended to stick to these codes to avoid confusion and incompatibility Two dashes in one of the table cells indicate that there is no customary code for this font property in the respective scheme whereas a blank cell means that the code is omitted Properties which are not catered for by the latinfamily macro are marked with an asterisk in the last column Please note that Fontname codes and Nrss codes cannot be mapped on a one to one basis in all cases since the two schemes are rather different in concept Weights and widths which are treated separately by the Fontname scheme need to be concatenated and handled as a series when using the Nrss since the latter does not have indep
103. book In ConTeXt Before one can typeset an XML file myfile xml one should create a TEX driver file myfile tex which should look something like this input xtag docbook starttext processXMLfilegrouped jobname xml stoptext Then TEX is invoked as texexec myfile tex to get a dvi file or as texexec pdf myfile tex to get a pdf file In the driver file xtag docbook is the file name of the module The XML document is input with the processXMLfilegrouped command The filename jobname xml is always correct provided the driver file and the XML file have the same base name Alternatively one can always use the same driver file in which the name of the XML file is changed each time The ConTEXt documentation indicates that one can also run the XML file as texexec xmlfilter docbook testxml xml This will not work because the name of the Doc book In ConTEXt module does not conform to ConTEXt s naming conventions It works if the module is renamed as xtag doc tex Customizing Docbook In ConTeXt A Docbook XML document is a normal ConTEXt document The commands that make up a ConTEXt document are also at work when a Docbook XML document is processed They are just one layer away from what the user sees Therefore the output can be cus tomized as for any ConTpXt document with ConTEXt s setup commands The setup commands should be given after the Docbook In ConTEXt module has been read so that they override the default setup commands in
104. buted the string literals file for Italian And of course nothing of this would have been possible without Hans Hagen s ConTpxt Najaar 2003 xml 37 application Drawing Message Sequence Charts with LaTeX Sjouke Mauw Computing Science Department Eindhoven University of Technology P O Box 513 NL 5600 MB Eindhoven The Netherlands sjouke win tue nl Victor Bos Software Construction Laboratory Turku Centre for Computer Science Lemminkdisenkatu 14 A FIN 20520 Turku Finland v bos abo fi abstract The Msc macro package facilitates LaTeX users to easily include Message Sequence Charts in their texts This article describes the motivation for developing the Msc macro package the features of the Msc macro package and the design of the msc macro package Introduction The Message Sequence Chart msc language is a visual formalism to describe interaction between components of a system The language is standardized by the rru Inter national Telecommunication Union in Recommendation Z 120 ITO1 An introductory text on Msc can be found in RGG96 MSCs have a wide application domain ran ging from requirements specification to testing and docu mentation An example of a Message Sequence Chart is given in Figure 1 The msc shows an ftp login session to a CTAN archive Three players called instances are involved in the session User ftp client and CTAN at location ftp tex ac uk The instances are denoted b
105. c setinstypos usr y Underlying drawing engine The msc macro package uses the pstricks package see vZ93 or Chapter 4 of GMS94 to draw lines arrows and frames This package is now commonly available in LaT X distribu tions so relying on this package does not violate require ment 5 A drawback of pstricks is that it is incompatible with pdfLaTEX Consequently our Msc macro package is incompatible with pdfLaTgx too However there are other ways to generate pdf from LaTEX documents One option is to first convert the dvi file into PostScript e g using dvips and then convert the PostScript file into pdf e g us ing the ps2pdf utility included in ghostscript distributions http www cs wisc edu ghost Availability The Msc macro package is freely available at CTAN see directory macros latex contrib supported msc and at http www win tue nl sjouke mscpackage htm1 It is distributed under the LalrX Project Public License see http www latex project org lppl txt Documentation of the package consists of a user manual BMO2b and a reference manual BMO2a These documents are included in the distribution Conclusions The msc macro package enables users to include mscs in LaT X documents Furthermore the Mscs have a consist ent layout that can be configured by an appropriate set of parameters The package supports almost the complete ITU standard of the msc language including msc documents and high level
106. chikte slechts over twee typmagrietwielen die gebruikt werden voor respectievelijk gewone tekst en voetnoottekst Door te werken met hoofdletters onderstrepen en vet kon uniforme lay out worden aangebracht Voor mijn studentenbudget was dit wonder van techniek een prijzige aankoop Financi le argumenten hebben toen de doorslag gegeven want de veredelde typmachine kostte toen maar de helft van een PC zonder software jawel het tijdperk van de i286 en was zelfs drie keer goedkoper dan een Mac Gevolg van het budgetteren is dat ik nu enkel een getypte versie heb van mijn thesis en de digitale variant enkel kan geraadpleegd worden op de typmachine die de tekst mooi presenteert op een scherm van 10 regels hoog Conversie naar PC of Mac is niet mogelijk Het eerste schooljaar dat ik les gaf maakte ik op deze machine mijn weinige cursusma teriaal Maar de informatica was niet langer te stuiten een tweedehands PC gekocht met daarop Word6 Een wereld van mogelijkheden ging open Meerdere lettertypes invoegen van clipart landscape afdrukken uitwisselen van documenten Het nodige overtypwerk werd erbij genomen als ook de eerste strubbelingen met nukkige software Groot was m n opluchting toen de opvolger Wordg7 verscheen Dit pakket had dui delijk meer onder de motorkap M n enthousiasme leidde zelfs tot het delen van m n opgedane kennis In de scholengroep waar ik werkzaam ben gaf ik meerdere navor mingssessies Wordg7 Het gratis pakke
107. ckname of the receiver The optional parameter offset defines the number of levels the receive event is shifted vertically with respect to the send event Levels are discussed in the next paragraph Offsets are useful if two instances send messages to each other and then wait for the messages to be received For example Figure 2 shows messages a and b between instances i and j The receive event of message a occurs after the send event of message b and vice versa Both messages have offset 2 in order to place the receive events two levels below the send events Levels The height of an msc environment is determined by the number of levels and a fixed amount of vertical space above and below the first and last level respectively Levels are created by the nextlevel num command The optional parameter denotes the number of levels to be added its default value is 1 Levels are used to order events in time Recall that time runs from top to bottom i e it runs from higher levels to lower levels Events in the same level are drawn at equal vertical distance from the top of the msc The send event of a message will always be drawn in 39 application msc Messages Sjouke Mauw and Victor Bos begin msc Messages declinst i i declinst j j mess a i j 2 nextlevel mess b j i 2 nextlevel 2 end msc Figure 2 Using non zero message offsets the current level The receive event of a messag
108. corresponding year 2003 will also be available Pavel Jackowski mentioned http www jaroslaw pl festiwal I don t know about a site with Polish music sound lyrics translated but those who want some Russian lyrics with transliterations or translations are invited to visit my site and find some links to Russian bard music I wonder when we may enjoy the bonfire songs from GUST s site Evolving PDF standard At the moment we have PDF 1 5 with Acrobat 6 around the corner Jacko s octopussy model of several years ago with PS at the heart is replaced by PDF as the essential format 28 One or two pictures won t do although as for all we know a picture is worth a thousand words Moreover I have to wait untill I have ended my film in my camera and have the film developed printed and digitally written to CD My digital Quicktake 200 is out of order alas Pondering over an e paper approach I don t know as of yet what is the good approach compatible with TEX amp Co If we also like to have video in TEX amp Co then we have to use Adobe s Acrobat Acrobat gt version 5 allows sound and video import and I read that pdfT X offers facilities for this So we have either the old approach of just digital picture inclusion for books reports and ilks or the CD ROM multi media approach Interesting For this report I only included links to WWW s with photos gallery of pictures no sound as of yet alas For the music you
109. cript versions of European Computer Modern while the European Modern fonts by Y amp Y are augmented Postscript versions of the original Computer Modern type faces Please refer to the respective website for details and pricing Since I have never used any of these fonts I cannot comment on their quality or on any possible shortcomings 1 http www yandy com em htm 2 http www micropress inc com fonts ecfonts ecmain htm TUTORIAL II STANDARD FONT SETS While the latinfamily shorthand is very convenient it is not capable of cop ing with complex installation scenarios Sooner or later you will probably have more specific requirements or simply desire more control over the basics This will require using lower level fontinst commands in most cases 11 1 The fontinst file In this tutorial we will essentially repeat the scenario discussed in the previous one This time however we will employ lower level commands The verbose file introduced here will also serve as a template for subsequent tutorials input fontinst sty substitutesilent bx b After loading fontinst we set up an alias that will suppress a warning when the respective font is substituted Why would we want to set up this particular alias Note that bx is the Nrss code of the bold extended series The Latex macros textbf and bfseries do not switch to a fixed series they use bfdefault instead which is set to bx by default As long as you are using the Computer
110. d LaTEX up to now are the first four The petite caps font is a special variant of the small caps font with even smaller capitals The fractions font and the ligatures we have not yet looked at in detail We will provide you with the steps we needed for using MrsEavesJustLigltalic MAPS Installing fonts in La X a user s experience Table 2 Renaming of Mrs Eaves files Original New Fontname Font name file name file name MrsEavesRoman MEAVROMA AFM fevr8a afm MrsEavesRoman MEAVROMA PFB fevr8a pfb MrsEaveslItalic MEAVITAL AFM fevri8a afm MrsEavesltalic MEAVITAL PFB fevri8a pfb MrsEavesBold MEAVBOLD AFM fevb8a afm MrsEavesBold MEAVBOLD PFB fevb8a pfb MrsEavesSmallCaps MEAVSMCA AFM fevrc8a afm MrsEavesSmallCaps MEAVSMCA PFB fevrc8a pfb the first four within TEX and we simply followed the first tutorial of Philipp Lehman s installation guide 7 which is suitable for installing simple fonts with a Latin alphabet The first problem was that Mrs Eaves is not mentioned in Karl Berry s Fontname scheme so we had to come up with a new font name We selected fev The letter f stands for small public foundries The Emigre foundry seems to fit the bill here The two letter combination ev is unused up to now and seems fitting for the name Mrs Eaves With the other guidelines for font naming we came up with the precise naming as seen in table 2 Note that the files with both extension afm and extension pfb need to be renamed Rena
111. d aecompl which adds Metafont versions of the missing charac ters but that again brings up the problem we were trying to avoid in the first 1 http www ctan org tex archive fonts ae 2 http www ctan org tex archive fonts zefonts NN UR WN EE NOU eB WN He 22 THE BASICS TYPEFACE FONTS NAME FORMAT Computer Modern CM Metafont cM Blue Sky Postscript cM Bakoma Postscript AE virtual fonts ZE virtual fonts European Computer Modern EC amp TC Metafont EC amp TC Micropress Postscript Tt2001 Postscript CM super Postscript Latin Modern LM Postscript European Modern EM Postscript TABLE 1 Computer Modern fonts and formats place A different complement called aeguil1 at least adds Postscript versions of the guillemets An enhanced version of sabon sty might then look like this NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage sabon 2002 04 17 v1 0 Adobe Sabon with AE RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp RequirePackage ae RequirePackage aeguil1 renewcommand rmdefault psb endinput The ze fonts take a different approach to work around this problem the miss ing characters are taken from standard Postscript fonts such as Times and Hel vetica This means that there will be some typographical inconsistencies but we are safe from a technical point of view While the Ar fonts and the correspond ing supplemental packages ship with most Tex distributions you might need to download t
112. d coded number of members to be present at a meeting for any decision to be taken Sometimes nothing is specified about disolving the lug which can lead to endless discussions Boards that don t perform well struggle for power in compatible personalities poor discussion technique poor management and hidden agendas are only a few of the problems that a lug or any organization may have to face Part of the problem is that the goals of a lug are often un clear or too abstract promote usage of TEX Financial problems fuzzy bookkeeping insufficient in sight and control an amateurish approach and poor in dependent auditing are some the problems that have oc curred Big risks can be involved Who can afford a big conference like EuroTEX What will happen if the tax man starts an inquiry CD rom production problems we ve seen 4TEX thrive for several year but then it died because of internal con flicts TEXlive has been very successful but is very vulner able because of the extremely small size of the team that produces it Journals MAPS Baskerville TUGboat TEXnische Kom die are having problems acquiring enough articles and or publishing on time Meetings the organization and timing of meetings is of ten more or less random cheap locations can be hard to find conferences can be costly risky and some lugs opt for electronic only meetings e g the
113. dd customizations add new ideas I plan to move forward to more generic work to support formatting of XML documents using TEX as the typesetting tool Availability Currently Docbook In ConTpxXt is available separately from the ConTpxXt distribution from my web site5 Michael Wiedmann s web page with Docbook tools has a link to the Docbook In Context files Programming Docbook In ConTeXt ConTEXt and XML ConTpxt can take XML documents as input For that purpose it contains a non validating XML parser which recognizes XML tags as markup instructions And it has an API 4 http xml apache org fop 5 http www hobby nl scaprea context 6 http www miwie org db context index html Najaar 2003 xml 29 xml 30 Simon Pepping Application Programmer s Interface which allows one to define actions for those tags This is called mapping XML tags to ConTEXt A typical mapping instruction is defineXMLenvironment element start action stop action During the start and stop actions one has access to the attribute values of the element For example this is how one reads the align attribute of an entry element in a table and issues the corresponding setup command for ConTpXt s TABLE environment doifXMLvar entry align expanded setupTABLE align XMLvar entry align ConTEXt s programming interface for XML mapping is robust Rarely if ever does one get tangled in expansion problems But as is seen i
114. ded by the base and the expert package offered by Agfa Monotype The base package contains four text fonts regular regular italic bold bold italic jan___ afm jani__ afm janb__ afm janbi___ afm jan___ inf jani____ inf janb____ inf janbi___ inf jan___ pfb jani___ pfb janb__ pfb janbi___ pfb jan___ pfm jani__ pfm janb__ pfm janbi___ pfm The expert package adds the corresponding expert fonts jny__ afm jnyi___ afm jnyb___ afm jnybi__ afm jny_ inf jnyi__ inf jnyb__ inf jnybi__ inf jny__ pfb jnyi__ pfb jnyb__ pfb jnybi__ pfb jny__ pfm jnyi__ pfm jnyb__ pfm jnybi__ pfm When talking about expert font sets in this tutorial we are referring to all of the above base plus expert package The proper file names for Monotype Janson are given in monotype map Expert fonts have essentially the same file name as the corresponding text fonts but their encoding code is 8x instead of 8a for Adobe Standard encoding After renaming the files we start off with the following file set mjnr8a afm mjnri8a afm mjnb8a afm mjnbi8a afm mjnr8a pfb mjnri8a pfb mjnb8a pfb mjnbi8a pfb mjnr8x afm mjnri8x afm mjnb8x afm mjnbi8x afm mjnr8x pfb mjnri8x pfb mjnb8x pfb mjnbi8x pfb There are two ways to install an expert font set Apart from writing a verbose fontinst file using low level commands we may also use the latinfamily macro We will take a look at the latter case first and proceed with a verbose fontinst file afterwards v 1 B
115. e end msc The title of the Msc is defined by the title parameter The optional parameter titlepos determines the position of the title By default it is 1 left aligned Other possible values are c centered and r right aligned Instances Instances are declared with the declinst nn an in command The starred version produces a fat instance which will not be discussed in this paper The nn parameter defines a nickname of the instance Nicknames identify instances and are used to draw messages and events The an parameter defines the above name of the instance This is the text to be placed above the instance head symbol the rectangle at the top of an instance The in parameter defines the inside name of the instance This is the text to be placed inside the instance head symbol Both the inside name and the above name may be empty Messages Messages are drawn with the mess pos txt s r offset command The optional pos parameter defines the position of so called self messages messages from an instance to itself The default value of pos is 1 to the left of the instance and another possible value is r to the right of the instance The txt parameter defines the label of the arrow representing the message The s parameter is the nickname of the instance on which the send event occurs i e the nickname of the sender The r parameter is the nickname of the instance on which the receive event occurs i e the ni
116. e relax metrics unsetglyph currency endmetrics With this additional resource what happens is this psbr8r afm is read and processed the currency slot is cleared by unsetcur mtx then bsbr8r afm is read filling the currency slot with its euro glyph which is encoded as the cur rency symbol in bsbr8r afm Our metric file reseteur mtx will then move the euro symbol found in bsbr8r afm to the euro slot and clear the currency slot After that we read psbr8r afm again to get the original Adobe Sabon cur rency symbol of back Our virtual font will now contain all glyphs found in Adobe Sabon plus the euro symbol of Bitstream Classical Garamond all prop erly encoded Note that for this to work we need a complete install of Bitstream Classical Garamond including map files for dvips and pdftex in addition to the steps outlined above TUTORIAL V EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP Expert fonts are complements to be used in conjunction with regular text fonts They usually contain optical small caps additional sets of figures hanging inferior superior the f ligatures ff fi fl ff and ffl plus a few text fractions and some other symbols Since they are companion fonts only which do not contain the regular uppercase and lowercase alphabet they are not useful on their own To employ them in a sensible way we need the basic text fonts as well In this tutorial we will install the complete Monotype Janson font set as provi
117. e afgelopen keren dat Willi Egger voordrachten hield op NTG dagen bleek de tijd telkens zo krap bemeten door uitgelopen lezingen dat hem was verzocht zijn verhaal wat in te korten reden waarom we ditmaal nadrukkelijk een h le lezing hadden gevraagd Niemand had daar spijt van en na het verhaal van Willi kwamen er allerlei vragen en discussies los beantwoord en gestuurd door zowel Willi Egger als Sanne Dijkstra die speciaal voor de lezing van Willi was gebleven Ferdy Hanssen liet daarna zien hoe je door de aanwijzingen van een paar handleidin gen secuur en geduldig toe te passen zonder al te veel vallen en opstaan zelf een Typer font kunt installeren Hoe ingewikkeld dat is hangt deels af van de keuze van het font Voor veel fonts staat al bijna alles op de TEXLive CD DVD voor andere moeten tal van bestanden worden gegenereerd gekopieerd veranderd van naam Na de theepauze nam Hans Hagen plaats achter de sprekerstafel Als Hans vertelt over de nieuwste ontwikkelingen dan is het opletten geblazen Soms verschijnen er dermate nooit vertoonde beelden op het beamerscherm dat er enige tijd overheen gaat voordat je je realiseert wat er eigenlijk aan de hand is Als je dan een deel van Hans tekst hebt gemist moet je je stevig concentreren om de boot niet ernstig te missen In dit geval kwam er een PDF document op het scherm waar allerlei dingen op konden worden ingevuld Andere schermen werden geopend en gesloten en een typisch TEX run log scherm
118. e the following construct usefont U pmnp m n char 97 As this is rather awkward and requires looking at the afm file to find out the encoding slot of each ornament we will implement a higher level solution The problem is that ornament fonts do not conform to any encoding so there is no standard we could rely on as far as the order of the glyphs in the font is concerned We have to provide this information explicity in minion sty To facilitate this we define the following macro newcommand DeclareTextOrnament 7 expandafter def csname 1 orn roman 2 endcsname 3 4 5 6 7 To declare the first ornament of Minion this macro would be employed as fol lows DeclareTextOrnament pmn 1 U pmnp m n 97 We use the first three letters of the font family name as an identifier pmn and assign a number 1 in this case to the ornament defined by the remaining argu ments These arguments form a complete font declaration with a syntax similar to that of the Nrss macro DeclareFontShape The last argument is the encod ing slot of the ornament 97 here as given in the afm file You might wonder why we use a complete font declaration here Since all ornaments are located in the same font using the same encoding series and shape this seems to be redundant In this case this is actually true The problem is that ornaments are not neccessarily provided in dedicated fonts Adobe Garamond for example comes
119. e T Xnical ingredients are there and well cooked Social life is very cosy and the location excellent Moreover if the meal goes with some music it can t be but a success This time was no exception For me the BachoTpxs are the off off TUG meetings they substantiate the TexX life I like Acknowledgements Thank you GUST for having invited me again 3 you have definitely switched me in TEX amp Co active mode again although there is much activity in the world outside the world beyond TEX amp Co s purpose Thank you conference committee and speakers for the nice material you offered Thank you Jola for all the care you gave us especially for organizing the lunch package which paved our way back Thank you photographers for making your photos available such that I could incorporate in this report links to them 3 Thank you all those present for the nice and cosy atmosphere See you next year if not earlier My case rests have fun and all the best Appendices Experience in writing this e paper I ended up with a hybrid a mixture of a classical paper and an e paper take for example the page size which is A4 biased and that photos are not included but just linked to which adheres to the hypertext idea 30 The functionality meaning we can just refresh the TEX amp Co layer s independently of what we did with the other layers 31 But as promised on the EuroBachoTEX I would have come nonetheless 32 Not all photos linked
120. e aangepast om het er beter uit te laten zien en die met de fontgrootte mee te laten schalen 24 Tenslotte ik zou ook wel mijn statuten document willen veranderen in een statuten LaTEX klasse alleen doe ik dit liever samen met iemand die hier al wat meer ervaring in heeft om gelijk een goed bruikbare statuten cls te maken voor ieders gemak Bij deze ook hier een oproep aan men sen die hier een steentje willen bijdragen Noot Wybo Door de ex als eenheid te gebruiken zorg je dat de rule afmetingen meeschalen met het font maar dat moet je dan ook voor de diepte doen De height 6ex genereert een hrule die op de baseline ligt en een hoogte heeft die 0 6 maal de x hoogte is De depth 2pt verwijdert aan de on derkant 2pt zodat als 0 6 maal de x hoogte kleiner is dan 2pt de hrule zelfs helemaal verdwijnt De oplossing is dus def mrulefill leavevmode leaders hrule height 6ex depth 5ex hfill kern0pt zodat je hrule 0 55 0 45 0 1ex breed wordt en met zijn midden op 0 55 0 45 2 een halve x hoogte terechtkomt Cursieve indextermen Maarten Wisse schreef Als ik dit compileer documentclass article usepackage makeidx makeindex begin document Ik doe dit in de hoofdtekst index ambitus textit ambitus en ergens anders footnote index ambitus textit ambitus Een voetnoot met een indexterm printindex end document dan wordt een ind file gegenereerd met daarin MA
121. e admit it had no software that could produce documents of the level of complexity that pdf TEX could easily generate NTS this New Typesetting System was initially sup posed to be the successor of TEX as we know it but even tually it turned out that for various reasons it could only be a complete rewrite of TEX in a different programming language which should make the implementation of exten sions much easier This may or may not happen but any way this project proved that the TEX community at large represented by many lugs is capable of re building a sys tem as complex as TEX A true successor to TEX will be come essential soon enough as the world progresses community Mailing lists and news groups several of these have been very successful in providing support to IEX users of all levels and as a platform for discussions of various TEXnical issues Conferences every year there are at least a few success ful meetings which last half a day up to a week where progress is made by discussing TEXniques and where rep resentatives of lugs can gather to coordinate their efforts in a friendly environment International contacts during lug meetings over the years some of the meetings of lugs which used to be local have become more and more international e g GUST DANTE UKTUG and NTG meetings New Webcalendar is a web based system that all lugs ca
122. e can be drawn in another level using the offset parameter of the mess command Note that levels are not part of the MSC language they are just an implementation means to draw MSCs Using the commands described so far we can generate the MSC of Figure 1 The LaTEX input to generate that MSC is given below The length instdist used in the last mess command defines the distance between instances of an MSC and is one of the parameters to configure the Msc macro package Here it is used to create a parbox that is 15 smaller than the distance between the instances of the MSc begin figure tb begin center begin msc ftp login to CTAN archive declinst usr User declinst ftp ftp client declinst ctan ftp tex ac uk CTAN mess ftp tex ac uk usr ftp nextlevel mess connect ftp ctan nextlevel mess getlogin ctan ftp nextlevel mess login ftp usr nextlevel mess anonymous usr ftp nextlevel mess anonymous ftp ctan next level mess Ok ctan ftp nextlevel 2 mess parbox b 85 instdist 40 centering command successful ftp usr end msc end center end figure Actions Actions are events that can be used to model internal activity of a particular instance Actions are defined with the action txt nn command The txt parameter defines the text to be placed inside the action symbol The nn parameter is the nickname of the instance that executes the action The action w
123. e for Helvetica and Courier COMPUTER MODERN AND T1 ENCODING 21 1 6 Computer Modern and T1 encoding The Computer Modern fonts designed for T1 and Ts1 encoding are called Ec and Tc fonts respectively together known as European Computer Modern When switching to T1 encoding we implicitly switch to these fonts Note that Euro pean Computer Modern while being derived from Donald Knuth s original Computer Modern typefaces is not simply a T1 encoded drop in replacement Over the years it has evolved into an independent typeface The additional fonts created for the European Computer Modern family have been subject to debate based on their design Some of them are considered to be typographically infe rior to the original designs From a technical perspective the problem with the European Computer Modern fonts is that historically they have been available in Metafont format only This implies that Postscript and Ppr files will contain bitmap representations of these fonts when we switch to T1 encoding Bitmap fonts however have a fixed resolution and so are not independent of the output device They are not suitable for on screen display and a major inconvenience for every print shop if they are tolerated at all Donald Knuth had designed the Computer Modern fonts in Metafont for mat and with oT1 encoding in mind Blue Sky Research and Y amp Y developed Postscript versions of these fonts later which were donated to the public in 1997 and h
124. e info fontname 8r enc 630 632 633 634 635 636 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 UNCODED EURO SYMBOL 45 empty the slot has to be set explicitly with a nextslot command This is done for quotesinglbase above We want to add the euro symbol in slot 128 so we add the following comment The following 32 slots 128 159 are based on Windows ANSI nextslot 128 setslot Euro comment The euro currency symbol texteuro endsetslot nextslot 130 setslot quotesinglbase comment A German single quote mark quotesinglbase similar to a comma but with different sidebearings endsetslot Since slot 127 is empty and the last slot defined was 126 we need to set the slot explicitly by adding nextslot before actually defining the encoding position When defining the slot keep in mind that the glyph names are case sensitive euro is not equivalent to Euro We also add an explanation so that the com mented listing of the encoding vector provides a meaningful explanation This is all we need It might be a good idea to update title and date at the begin ning of the file to avoid any confusion Finally we install this file in the branch tex fontinst base of the local Tex tree If our system has been set up as recommended in the first tutorial fontinst will now pick up our updated en coding vector Now we need a version of 8r enc that matches our 8r etx This is what the relevant part of 8r e
125. e math fonts The only way to use them with the default setup is rather cumbersome the command oldstylenums will take the numbers to be typeset as hanging figures as an argument There is a set of virtual fonts for the European Computer Modern fonts which make these hanging figures the default in Tex s text mode so that they are readily available These fonts are provided in the Eco package available from craN Please refer to the package documentation for installation and usage instructions Since this package es sentially consists of a set of virtual fonts it should also work in conjunction with the cm super fonts mentioned in section 1 6 1 http www ctan org tex archive fonts eco TUTORIAL IV THE EURO CURRENCY SYMBOL While the euro symbol has been supported by Latex for quite some time it is included in Ts1 encoding and the textcomp package provides the corresponding text command texteuro the real problem is getting fonts that provide this glyph and setting them up accordingly You might want to read this tutorial even if you are not affected by this particular issue because it deak with some generic encoding problems that you may encounter in a differ ent context as well There is a bit more to updating a font than drawing a euro symbol and putting it in the font It has to be properly encoded as well Since the euro symbol is not defined in Adobe Standard encoding it can normally only be included as an uncoded
126. e spent an enormous amount of time on program listings At first it seemed easy ConTpxt has a verbatim environment which suits our purpose Then it was pointed out to me that some program listings contain CDATA sections which were not treated well by my solution I realized that a program listing is not really a verbatim environment because it does not disable XML tags I dived deep into ConTpxt s verbatim environment and came up with a variant that supported two types of verbatim one real verbatim for CDATA sections and one that did only line oriented layout for program listings Moreover it was nestable so that it could deal with CDATA sections within program listings But it remained problematic to get it quite right When the end of the CDATA section or of the program listing element was followed by text on the same line this text was lost And my white space tool did exactly that put the following text right behind the end of the program listing element When I revisited the problem a few months later it dawned on me that the whole ver batim approach was wrong Neither CDATA sections nor program listing environments have anything to do with TEX s notion of verbatim CDATA sections just disable XML Najaar 2003 xml 35 xml 36 Simon Pepping markup They may occur anywhere in an XML document and have no semantic mean ing Indeed an XML parser does not even report whether CDATA sections are used in an XML document it sim
127. e uppercase alphabet and putting the scaled glyphs in the encoding positions of the low ercase alphabet Fortunately we do not have to deal with the actual low level glyph scaling We simply load tic etx a special encoding vector which will take care of that using the value of smallcapsscale as the scale factor install font psbro8t psbro8r latin t1 T1 psb m s1 install font psbri8t psbri8r latin t1 T1 psb m it Since the slanting was already performed on the raw fonts the virtual slanted and the italic fonts are handled just like the upright ones Now all regular fonts are done and we can repeat this part 15 18 for the bold fonts install font sc install font install font install font psbb8t psbb8r latin t1 T1 psb b n psbbc8t psbb8r latin t1c T1 psb b psbbo8t psbbo8r latin t1 T1 psb b psbbi8t psbbi8r latin t1 T1 psb b sl it After that we add virtual fonts for Ts1 encoding installfont psbr8c psbr8r textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m n Like latin mtx textcomp mtx is an auxiliary metric file provided by fontinst It should always be added when creating Ts1 encoded fonts for the textcomp package The third argument the encoding vector refers to ts1 etx in this case As Ts1 encoding is for symbols only and we did set up a shape substitu tion we do not need a Ts1 encoded small caps font Slanted and italic fonts are hand
128. eEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb The situation is similar for the slanted fonts The font files embedded in the Postscript file are not slanted they are upright Fontinst has performed the slanting for the font metrics only it does not touch the font outlines at all The slanting of the glyph outlines will be performed by a Postscript printer or an interpreter like Ghostscript After resolving the virtual fonts all that dvips does as far as the raw fonts are concerned is reading the files listed in psb map and embedding them along with the SlantFont instruction The transforma tion of the glyph outlines takes place when the Postscript code is rendered on screen or on paper Both ReEncodeFont and SlantFont are instructions for the application finally performing the rendering The value of the SlantFont instruction has to correspond to the slant factor used in the fontinst file As mentioned above fontinst s representation of the slant factor is slightly differ ent The value used in the map file is a real number corresponding to fontinst s integer slant factor divided by 1000 That s why its precision is fixed to three decimal places Let s compare a line of the map file to the corresponding line of the fontinst file transformfont psbro8r slantfont 167 reencodefont 8r fromafm psbr8a psbro8r Sabon Roman 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb Essentially think of m
129. econd argument is code to be executed whenever this typeface is used This is often employed to suppress hyphenation of fixed width typefaces by setting the hyphenation character to a non existing encoding position If we wanted to suppress hyphenation for this font family we would call the macro like this latinfamily psb hyphenchar font 1 We save the file as drv psb tex for example and run it through tex tex drv psb tex The latinfamily macro will create metric files virtual fonts and auxiliary files for four different encodings Tex Base 1 oT1 T1 and Ts1 While Tex Base 1 serves as the basis for virtual fonts using other encodings it is usually not em ployed as such on the Latex level although latinfamily provides font defi nition files for the Tex Base 1 encoded fonts as well The ori encoding is a 7 bit legacy encoding solely suitable for text using the English alphabet only because it requires the use of composite glyphs when typesetting accented letters These glyphs are inferior to the native glyphs pro vided by Postscript fonts When using oT1 encoding and typesetting the letter a with a grave accent for example Tex does not use the real glyph as provided by the font because oT1 discards all accented letters This amounts to almost half of the glyphs found in common Postscript fonts Instead Tex will use the stand alone grave accent and move it over the lowercase letter a to form a com posite glyph Apart from
130. eencodefont 8r fromafm psbr8a psbbo8r slantfont int slant reencodefont 8r fromafm psbb8a reencodefont 8r fromafm psbrc8 reencodefont 8r fromafm psbbj8a a psbrco8r slantfont int slant psbboj8r slantfont int slant In addition to that we need slanted versions of the new fonts Slanting the small caps font 16 may seem like a strange thing to do at first since we do not really want to create a slanted small caps shape But since regular weight hanging figures are found in the small caps font we need a slanted version of that as well to provide matching figures for the slanted shape of the psbj family later installfonts install family T1 psb installfamily TS1 psb installfont psbr8t psbr8r latin t1 T1 psb m n installfont psbrc8t psbrc8r unsetnum kernoff psbr8r kernon latin t1 T1 psb m sc The file psbrc8r provides small caps and hanging figures but we want psb to be a consistent family using lining figures throughout Therefore we read psbrc8r first and clear the encoding positions of all figures using commands from a separate metric file unsetnum mtx right after that This file is listed further down all it does is clear all figure slots When adding psbr8r after 23 24 25 26 27 28 36 OPTICAL SMALL CAPS AND HANGING FIGURES wards the figure slots of the virtual font psbrc8t will be filled using the lining figures fou
131. efinieer index met let origindex index renewcommand index 1 origindex 1 Maar dit vereist dat je geen speciale tekens zoals en in je index entries gebruikt zonder daar een voor te zetten zoals dat in index wel kan Vervolgens kwam Piet met nog een derde oplossing af komstig van Jeremy Gibbons uit TeX and TUG news Hey it works maak en gebruik een style file met daarin plainfootnote sty incorporate plain TeX s trickery into LaTeX s footnote macros to allow verb within footnotes the argument to footnote is not read before it is executed Najaar 2003 Lax long def footnotetext insert footins bgroup footnotesize interlinepenalty interfootnotelinepenalty splittopskip footnotesep splitmaxdepth dp strutbox floatingpenalty MM hsize columnwidth parboxrestore edef current label csname p footnote endcsname the fnmark G make fntext rule z footnotesep ignorespaces futurelet next fo t def fo t ifcat bgroup noexpand next let next f t else let next f t fi next def f e t bgroup aftergroup foot let next def f t 1 1 foot def foot strut egroup Al Piets oplossingen bleken te werken de tweede zelfs be ter dan hij zelf verwachtte Tenslotte kwam Johannes Braams met de suggestie probeer eens makeindex c als je tenminste makeindex gebruikt Volgens Frank Mittelbach zou dat moeten hel pen zonder ander truken
132. endent categories axes for weight and width The variant category of the Fontname scheme on the other hand which embraces several different properties including shapes like italics as well as spe cial glyph sets such as small caps or alternative figures does not correspond to a single NFss axis Some variants like italics and small caps for example are mapped to the shape axis of the Nrss Others such as alternative figures are handled in completely different ways Table 5 lists variants corresponding to the most common Nrss shapes only When looking at the documentation of the Fontname scheme you will find a lot more variant codes not mentioned here Although they are used for file naming they do not or at least do not neces sarily correspond to a customary NFss shape Hanging inferior and superior numbers Fontname codes j 0 and 1 for example are treated as variants by the Fontname scheme but they are usually implemented as independent font families on the level of the Nrss For the encodings listed in table 6 the situation is similar For example a virtual font in T1 encoding featuring expert glyphs is indicated by adding 9e to the file name However on the level of the Nrss the encoding code is T1 for all T encoded fonts and the fact that the font provides expert glyphs is expressed by adding the letter x to the font family name 83 84 WEIGHT CODE TABLES FONTNAME CODE NFSS SERIES ult
133. enloos het realiseert bovendien nog n van mijn principi le doelstellingen Najaar 2003 advocacy advocacy 12 Koen Wybo lerlei zaken die je in overweging moet nemen wil je niet gebonden zijn aan n bepaalde producent Niet enkel de grafische tekstverwerkers lijden aan dit euvel Ook bepaalde TEX varianten zijn van commerci le aard Economisch betekent ook dat je software gewoon moet werken Wat ben je met een Office pakket waar je jezelf continu moet herinneren om tijdig op te slaan omdat een crash op de minst verwachte meest ongelegen tijdstippen kan plaatsvinden Anders uitgedrukt crashes genereren altijd een vorm van verlies Zij het in verlies van typtijd of inspirerende gedachten van het moment die verloren zijn gegaan Principieel LaTEX is Vrije software Dit betekent dat elke gebruiker het recht heeft om de software te gebruiken kopi ren verspreiden bestuderen veranderen en verbeteren Het resultaat hiervan is zichtbaar in de opkomst van het GNU Linux besturingssysteem een juweeltje van OS dat naast de kernel een gans scala aan vrije software omvat Deze GNU gedachte brengt een ecosysteem tot stand waar mondiaal mensen werken aan software die voor iedereen beschikbaar is Hierdoor ontstaat niet een wat sommigen noemen commu nistische variant van software maar brengt het betere kwaliteit tot stand Bovendien ont staat zo een schare aan men sen die zich willen inzetten Richard
134. ent except as expressly provided for under this license Any other attempt to copy modify sublicense or distribute the document is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this license However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this license will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 10 Future revisions of this license The Free Software Foundation may publish new revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time Such new versions will be sim ilar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new prob lems or concerns Each version of the license is given a distinguishing version number If the document specifies that a particular numbered version of this license or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and con ditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been pub lished not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the document does not specify a version number of this license you may choose any version ever published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation 1 http www gnu org copyleft 1 23 1 20 1 10 1 00 0 80 0 68 0 66 0 65 0 60 0 54 0 52 0 50 0 43 0 40 0 30 0 20 2003 08 31 2003 07 17 2003 03 27 2003 03 25 2003 03 23 2003 02 09 2003 01 26 2003 01 19
135. ents by a wooden cross Each compartment was divided into a series of boxes by thin wooden strips The depth of such type cases was small normally not exceeding 3 cm The layout of type cases varied over time Our drawing is an example of a three quarter type case popular in The Netherlands When typesetting text by hand most of the letters are lower case To facilitate picking the letters lower case letters were located in the lower part of the type case From the size and location of the different boxes one can deduce the number of single letters needed to assemble a text The layout of a type case was optimized for typesetting speed You might have realized that the expression of lower case and upper case capitals letters for the different fonts is linked to the location of the letters in the type case This is true for both English and Dutch onderkast en bovenkast kapitalen Najaar 2003 Analysis of the type case While looking for a straightforward approach to this draw ing it seemed best to build the type case from four tables with the following characteristics arranged in a two by two matrix All four tables have the same width All table rows are 6em high The width of the columns of the upper and lower left tables have a relation of 1 75 2 The two top tables each have four rows The two lower tables each have eight rows Part of the cells are combined rows and or col
136. equirePackage textcomp RequirePackage nfssext DeclareOption oldstyle renewcommand rmdefault psbj DeclareOption 1ining renewcommand rmdefault psb ExecuteOptions oldstyle ProcessOptions endinput The style file nfssext sty might look like this NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage nfssext 2003 03 14 v1 2 Experimental NFSS Extensions newcommand exfs tempa newcommand exfs tempb newcommand exfs try fami ly 1 let exfs tempa relax begingroup font fami ly 1 try load fontshape expandafter i fx csname curr fontshape endcsname rel ax PackageWarning nfssext Font family f encoding 1 not available MessageBreak Ignoring font switch else gdef exfs tempa fontfamily 1 selectfont fi endgroup exfs tempa 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 FONTS SUPPLIED WITH TEX 41 This is an outline for a command that makes use of a few Nrss internals to switch to a specific family if and only if it is available Essentially we try to load the requested family in the current encoding 8 If this succeeds we set up a macro 14 to be expanded later that will actually switch font families if not we print a warning message 10 12 and do nothing def exfs get base 1 2 3 4 nil 1 2 3 DeclareRobustCommand Instyle not math alphabet Instyle relax exfs try fami ly expandafter exfs get base fefamily nil DeclareRobustCommand osstyle not
137. er mende kleding 45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en bescher mende kleding S45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 Najaar 2003 Figuur 1 de opgemaakte pagina toepassing 49 Karel H Wesseling k h wesseling planet nl 27 November 2003 50 metapost Aligning METAPOST graphs in CONTEXT combinations Introduction For scientific plotting I like to use the Graph package by John Hobby within CONTEXT and when I have two or more separate graphs made I combine them into one figure with one figure caption Combining is easy but aligning the graphs in a pleasing way required a trick Attempt 1 To demonstrate the problem I prepared tw
138. er functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom to assure everyone the ef fective freedom to copy and redistribute it with or without modifying it either commercially or noncommercially Secondarily this license preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work while not being consid ered responsible for modifications made by others This license is a kind of copyleft which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense It complements the GNU General Public License which is a copyleft license designed for free software We have designed this license in order to use it for manuals for free software because free software needs free documentation a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does But this license is not limited to software manuals it can be used for any textual work regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book We recommend this license principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference 1 Applicability and definitions This license applies to any manual or other work in any medium that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this license Such a notice grants a world wide royalty free license unlimited in duration to use that work under the conditions stated herein The document below refers
139. erd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en bescher mende kleding S45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken 36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en bescher mende kleding S45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en besch
140. ered based on the relative position of their send and receive events on instances We could have decided to provide commands to order the events and then let the package compute the final layout of the msc However apart from the fact that this 42 Sjouke Mauw and Victor Bos computation is not trivial this strategy fails with respect to requirement 3 no automatic structuring and layout Another strategy is to use an extra parameter of the msc environment to define the vertical size of an Msc There are several drawbacks to this approach First of all the vertical size has to be computed Secondly commands to draw messages actions regions etc should have one or more additional parameter to indicate the vertical position at which they should be drawn Finally if a new message is to be added somewhere in the msc the vertical placement parameter of commands below the new message should probably be updated Therefore we chose to only provide a command nextlevel to advance the current height of the msc By increasing the current height between two messages the partial order can be defined Furthermore one can eas ily add new messages to the MSC at any vertical position without having to change parameters of existing messages These decisions resulted in an msc environment in which the msc is drawn in a top left bottom right fashion Nicknames As explained above the Msc macro package uses nicknames to identify instances If a
141. eressant verhaal uit TUGboat mogen overnemen over het tekenen van Message Sequence Charts Roland Smith laat zien hoe hij etiketten die we in doe het zelf zaken en drogisterijen nog wel eens tegenkomen in LaTEX genereert Karel Wesseling laat zien hoe METAPOST figuren onderling kunnen worden uitgelijnd Willi Egger gunt ons een blik in een ouderwetse zetkast en laat en passant zien hoe de btable etable omgeving gebruikt kan worden om een lade daaruit te tekenen Siep Kroonenberg heeft een primeur met de toepassing van pdf IEX s protruding characters in onze MAPsen schrijft er een prijsvraag zonder prijzen over uit Ferdy Hanssen neemt ons mee op de queeste van enkele font istallaties Hij verwijst daarbij naar Philipp Lehman s Font Installation Guide en last but not least we willen meer aandacht gaan schenken aan fonts Daarom is in dit nummer een facsimile opgenomen van de buitengewoon heldere en practisch bruikbare Font Installation Guide van Philipp Lehman We wensen u veel leesplezier Frans Goddijn Piet van Oostrum door Dilys Bronkhorst Ledenvergadering geleid door voorzitter Hans Hagen r Johan Vromans vertelt over MMDS community 32 NTG bijeenkomst Voor de 32 NTG bijeenkomst was vorm en inhoud als thema vastgesteld Een thema waarvan je denkt dat we daar niet eerder op zijn gekomen Tal van onder
142. ers dan wij gewend zijn naar de wetten en regels van het zetwerk Sommige dingen die Sanne in haar verhaal aanstipte zijn voor ons gesneden koek zoals de onwenselijkheid van kleinkapitalen als deze worden verkregen door hoofdletters domweg verkleind te zetten of het vet maken van letters door bestaande letters in dikker zwart te plaatsen Andere benaderingswijzen van vlakverdeling waren voor een aantal luisteraars wel nieuw zoals het bepalen van een ideaal vlak voor tekst op een vel door middel van het tekenen van diagonalen over een samenstel van twee pagina s Tenslotte gaf Sanne aan de hand van dia s van de 4 IEX manual haar suggesties voor de manier waarop je kritisch naar functionele vormgeving zou kunnen kijken community Johan Vromans door Dilys Bronkhorst Sanne Dijkstra Tenar van Kooten Niekerk en pianiste Cathelijne Maat Najaar 2003 community Ren van der Heijden door Dilys Bronkhorst Frans Goddijn Wonderlijk mooi sloot de voordracht van Willi Egger hier op aan De diagonalen die door Sanne Dijkstra werden genoemd bleken een startpunt van zijn verhandeling over gulden snede en eenvoudige constructietekeningen waarmee feilloos kan worden be paald waar je het beste je kantlijnen kunt plaatsen en hoeveel tekst je volgens beproefde vuistregels op je pagina kunt zetten Daarbij deed Willi ook uit de doeken hoe het komt dat boekjes die op A5 formaat zijn geproduceerd meestal zo vervelend in de hand liggen D
143. erstap naar LalEX zeker aan te raden Door het gescheiden houden van inhoud en vormgeving spaart mij dit heel wat uurtjes oplapwerk uit Niet enkel voor mijn eigen documenten maar ook deze die ik ontvang van collega s Immers door printerinstellingen aanwezige lettertypes enzovoorts verschilt een Word document op twee verschillende computers Tekstverwerkingsprogramma s zorgen voor het nodige comfort om op een effici nte wijze je resultaat in mijn geval een cursus godsdienst te verwezenlijken Men kijkt graag naar dit gebruiksgemak en gaat al te vaak voorbij aan de effecten van het gebonden zijn aan een bepaald programma op lange termijn Ben je zeker dat je na twintig jaar je documenten nog kan openen Hoeveel geld zul je in die tijd gespendeerd hebben aan noodzakelijke upgrades Stel dat de producent van het programma failliet gaat beschik je over vol doende conversiemogelijkheden om dit naar een ander programma over te brengen Al 1 voor de nieuwe versie van Word2003 plant Microsoft een nieuwe documentindeling Het zal voor men sen van de oude versie onmogelijk zijn de nieuwe versie te openen en te bewerken Ook zal de conversie van Word documenten door andere grafische tekstverwerkingsprogramma s zal niet meer mogelijk zijn 17 2 Gelukkig bestaat er voor mensen die liever grafisch werken een gratis office pakket dat zeker niet moet onderdoen voor zijn commerci le tegenhangers Openoffice 13 is niet enkel kost
144. es all fonts from Adobe Standard en coding to Tex Base 1 when creating metric files for Tex This affects the metrics only which are defined in the tfm files generated by fontinst while the glyph outlines as defined in the pfb file still use the font s native encoding Therefore we add a reencoding directive to the map file that will instruct all applications dealing with the actual glyph outlines to reencode them accordingly psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb Finally the last column contains a list of files that dvips will embed in the Post script file In this case we need the Postscript encoding vector 8r enc for Tex Base 1 encoding and the pfb file since we want the fonts to be embedded in the Postscript file Now the map file for our basic Sabon set looks like this 18 THE BASICS psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb psbri8r Sabon Italic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbri8a pfb psbb8r Sabon Bold TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb psbbi8r Sabon BoldItalic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbi8a pfb In addition to that we need to tell dvips about the slanted versions of all upright fonts which latinfamily creates by default We copy the lines for Sabon Roman and Sabon Bold and insert o the Fontname code for slanted fonts after the weight code of the Tex font name psbr8r becomes psbro8r and p
145. es of display work Without further ado we start off as usual nonstopmode input fontinst sty substitutesilent bx sb substitutenoisy sc n substitutenoisy si it When looking at our font set it is obvious that semibold should be used as the main bold weight hence we make it the default by substituting sb for bx Since the bold and black weights do not feature optical small caps we add appropriate substitutions for the sc and si italic small caps shapes transformfont pmnr8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnr8a transformfont pmnrc8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnrc8a transformfont pmnri8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnri8a transformfont pmnric8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnric8a transformfont pmns8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmns8a transformfont pmnsc8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnsc8a transformfont pmnsi8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnsi8a transformfont pmnsic8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnsic8a transformfont pmnb8r reencodefont 8r froma fm pmnb8a transformfont pmnbi8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnbi8a transformfont pmnc8r reencodefont 8r fromafm pmnc8a Reencoding you know the drill We reencode all base fonts using Adobe Stan dard as their native encoding While the swash fonts are based on Adobe Stan dard as well they contain a special set of glyphs and are handled like expert fonts
146. eschikte handschoenen en bescher mende kleding 45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en bescher mende kleding S45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Danker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijd
147. etary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors SGML or XML for which the prp and or processing tools are not generally available and the machine generated HTML Postscript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only The title page means for a printed book the title page itself plus such fol lowing pages as are needed to hold legibly the material this license requires to appear in the title page For works in formats which do not have any title page as such title page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work s title preceding the beginning of the body of the text A section entitled xyz means a named subunit of the document whose title either is precisely xyz or contains xyz in parentheses following text that trans lates xyz in another language Here xyz stands for a specific section name mentioned below such as Acknowledgements Dedications Endorsements or History To preserve the title of such a section when you modify the docu THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE 89 ment means that it remains a section entitled xyz according to this definition The document may include warranty disclaimers next to the notice which states that this license applies to the document These warranty disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this license but only as regards dis claiming warranties any other implication that
148. ex emigre mrseaves We also need a map file so programmes like xdvi and dvips know what to look for It can be tricky to write such a file but using Philipp Lehman s tutorial it turns out to be not very hard to do The map file we created can be seen in figure 4 We actually do not know if the value 0 167 as parameter to create a slanted font provides an aesthetically pleasing typeface The designer obviously never intended such a font to exist The map file should be named fev map and placed in the dvips config directory A simple package file like the one shown in figure 5 makes using the font in LaT X very easy Note that we use the T1 font encoding We simply follow Philipp Lehman s advice in this Those encodings are not yet clear to us This LaT X package is called mrseaves sty and placed in the directory tex latex emigre mrseaves All that is needed to make the new font work now is running the command mktexlsr or texhash followed by enabling the map file with the command updmap enable Map fev map It must be said that it was a pleasant surprise to see it actually work after this NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage mrseaves 2003 09 03 v0 1 Emigre MrsEaves RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp renewcommand rmdefault fev endinput Figure 5 Simple package for Mrs Eaves 63 fonts Ferdy Hanssen fevb8r MrsEavesBold TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt fevb8a pfb fevb
149. example the article title could be redefined as def XMLDBarticletitle 1 startalignment left bfb 1 stopalignment blank The section titles can be customized with ConTgxt s usual setuphead command blockquote epigraph and attribution The elements epigraph and blockquote have their own setup commands setupepigraph and setupblockquote which have the following options o narrower Both epigraph and blockquote are formatted using ConTgXt s nar rower environment The value of this option is a list of left right and middle that is passed on to the startnarrower command See the ConTEXt documenta tion for startnarrower for the effect of these settings o quote The value is on or off When on quotation marks are applied as with ConTEXt s quotation environment o command The value is a command or set of commands which are applied at the start of the narrower environment The element attribution is customized with the command setupattribution which has one option command The value is applied at the start of the attribution More customizations Customization has only recently obtained the attention it deserves More setup com mands like those for blockquote and epigraph will follow The distribution contains a document Customization xml which will contain an up to date description of the cus tomization options Other tools for the same task Docbook In ConTEXt is not the only tool for typesetting a Docbook docume
150. ferior inputetx t1 endencoding 2 1 2 All we need to do in t10 etx is use setcommand to predefine the digit macro as follows setcommand digit 1 linferior This will add the suffix inferior to all digits For superior figures the approach is similar We create an encoding vector called t11 etx read t one one since 1 is the Fontname code for superior figures relax encoding setcommand 1c 1 2 2 setcommand uc 1 2 1 setcommand 1 ctop 1 2 2 setcommand uctop 1 2 1 setcommand 1clig 1 2 2 setcommand uclig 1 2 1 setcommand digit 1 1lsuperior inputetx t1 endencoding With t10 etx and t11 etx at hand we may now create the font families mjn0 and mjni pretty much like we have generated mjnj Lets put the new encoding vectors in our working directory and go back to the fontinst file install fonts instal family T1 mjn0 instal font mjnr09e mjnr8r mjnr8x latin t10 71 mjn0 m n We add the code 0 to the name of the virtual font mjnr09e here use the encoding vector t10 etx and adapt the nrss font declaration in this case T1 mjn0 m n accordingly Other than that the virtual fonts of the mjn0 family are generated in the usual way m m install font mjnro09e mjnro8r mjnro8x latin t10 T1 mjn0 s install font mjnri09e mjnri8r mjnri8x latin t10 T1 mjnd H H instal font mjnb09e mjnb8r mjnb8x latin t10 T1 mjn0
151. fm 3i afm _3b afm _3bi___ afm 3 inf 3i inf _3b inf _3bi___ inf _3 pfb 3i pfb _3b pfb _3bi____ pfb 3 pfm 3i pfm _3b pfm _3bi___ pfm The Fontname map file adobe map defines the following names for these fonts zpeur EuroSerif Regular A 916 x zpeub EuroSeri f Bold A 916 3b zpeubi EuroSerif BoldItalic A 916 _3bi____ zpeuri EuroSerif Italic A 916 gt ae zpeurs EuroSans Regular A 916 zpeubs EuroSans Bold A 916 EEn zpeubis _EuroSans BoldItalic A 916 bi zpeuris EuroSans Italic A 916 ear zpeurt EuroMono Regular A 916 a zpeubt EuroMono Bold A 916 _2b zpeubit EuroMono BoldItalic A 916 2bi_ zpeurit EuroMono Italic A 916 1 We select all afm and all pfb files rename them and start off with the following file set zpeur afm zpeuri afm zpeub afm zpeubi afm zpeur pfb zpeuri pfb zpeub pfb zpeubi pfb zpeurs afm zpeuris afm zpeubs afm zpeubis afm zpeurs pfb zpeuris pfb zpeubs pfb zpeubis pfb zpeurt afm zpeurit afm zpeubt afm zpeubit afm zpeurt pfb zpeurit pfb zpeubt pfb zpeubit pfb As we do not really need fontinst when dealing with symbol fonts we simply run afm2tfm on each afm file to create a corresponding tfm file for Tex afm2tfm zpeur afm zpeur tfm afm2tfm zpeuri afm zpeuri tfm afm2tfm zpeub afm zpeub tfm afm2tfm zpeubi afm zpeubi tfm afm2tfm zpeurs afm zpeurs tfm afm2tfm zpeuris afm zpeuris tfm afm2tfm zpeubs afm zpeubs tfm afm2tfm zpeubis afm zpeubis tfm afm2tfm zpeurt afm zpeurt tfm afm2tfm
152. font selection guide The second chapter of this guide documents the standard NFss commands used to switch fonts under Latex Let s take a look at some examples To select Sabon at any point in a Latex file we use a command like fontfamily psb selectfont Sabon provides two weights which are readily available using compact font se lection macros like textbf and bfseries Larger font families may offer more than two weights To select a particular weight we use the fontseries command in conjunction with the Nrss series codes defined during the instal lation of the font family Please refer to the code table on page 84 of this guide for a list of the most common ness codes To select the semibold sb weight for example we would use the following construct fontseries sb selectfont Compact font switching macros such as mdseries and bfseries do not switch to a fixed Nrss font series they use mddefault and bfdefault for the regular and bold weight respectively If we want to use semibold as the de fault bold weight for example we simply redefine bfdefault accordingly renewcommand bfdefault sb In order to use Sabon as the default roman typeface for the whole document we redefine rmdefault in the preamble renewcommand rmdefault psb It is much more convenient to put the initialization of the font family into a dedicated style file sty though Our file sabon sty might look like this NeedsTeXFormat L
153. font sets only The latinfamily macro is not capable of dealing with sc amp os font sets in the same way These sets always require a fontinst file using low level commands such as the one discussed in tutorial 111 v 2 Verbose fontinst file While the latinfamily macro incorporates the most fundamental features of expert sets such as optical small caps and additional f ligatures it does not exploit all the glyphs found in expert fonts To use them you will need to use low level fontinst commands at least for parts of the fontinst file But before we start with our verbose fontinst file let s first take a look at some encoding issues specific to expert fonts When dealing with sc amp osF fonts in the third tu torial we had to rename some glyphs or move them around because in sc amp OSF fonts hanging figures and small caps are found in the standard slots for figures and the lowercase alphabet With small caps and hanging figures provided by expert fonts the installation is in fact simpler since all glyph names are unique To understand the difference we will take a brief look at the glyph names in the respective afm files Compare the names of lowercase glyphs as found in mjnr8a afm to the small caps glyph names in mjnr8x afm C 97 WX 427 Na B 59 13 409 426 C 98 WX 479 Nb B 18 13 442 692 C 99 WX 427 Nc B 44 13 403 426 uk WN OP 0 NN A 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 VERBOSE FONTINST FILE 57 C
154. ge nfssext 2003 03 14 v1 2 Experimental NFSS Extensions newcommand exfs tempa newcommand exfs tempb newcommand exfs try fami ly 2 let exfs tempa relax begingroup font fami ly 2 try load fontshape expandafter i fx csname curr fontshape endcsname rel ax edef exfs tempa 1 ifx exfs tempa empty PackageWarning nfssext Font family f encoding 2 not available MessageBreak Ignoring font switch else PackageInfo nfssext Font family f encoding 2 not available MessageBreak Font family f encoding 1 tried instead exfs try family 1 fi else gdef exfs tempa fontfamily 2 selectfont fi endgroup exfs tempa As soon as expert fonts come into play the lnstyle macro has to cater for two font families which depending on the font may contain lining figures a basic font family with a three character code or an expert family with a four character code ending with the letter x To make sure that nfssext sty will work for fonts like Janson as well as fonts without an expert set the first thing we need to do is extend our main font switching macro enabling it to cope with both cases To do so we will introduce an optional argument Essentially we try to load the font family given by the mandatory argument first 8 If this family is not available we do not quit with a warning but add a note to the log file 16 18 and try the family given by the optional argument next
155. glyph in regular Postscript text fonts An uncoded glyph is only accessible after reencoding and assigning it to a valid encoding position Some font foundries decided to follow this path in order to conform to Adobe Standard encoding Others preferred to drop some supposedly rarely used glyph and put the euro symbol in its encoding position instead While this violates the encoding standard it can be more convenient under certain circumstances In the following we will explore ways to handle both situations cleanly Finally we will learn how to take the euro symbol from an external font if none is provided by the text font itself 1v 1 Uncoded euro symbol While Adobe used to be rather inattentive to the problem at first the foundry is finally updating their typeface portfolio by gradually adding matching euro symbols to their fonts a process that has been promoted by the introduction of the Opentype font format Recent releases of Adobe Garamond for example already ship with matching euro symbols A quick look at the afm file shows that in this case the foundry decided to handle the encoding problem in a strict manner The new symbol is correctly labeled as Euro but it is not encoded by default as that would violate Adobe Standard encoding An encoding slot number of 1 tells us that the glyph was not assigned to any encoding position C 1 WX 572 N Euro B 13 14 542 640 In order to access it we need to reencode the f
156. hanges limited to the covers as long as they preserve the title of the document and satisfy these conditions can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly you should put the first ones listed as many as fit reasonably on the actual cover and continue the rest onto adjacent pages If you publish or distribute opaque copies of the document numbering more than 100 you must either include a machine readable transparent copy along with each opaque copy or state in or with each opaque copy a computer network location from which the general network using public has access to download using public standard network protocols a complete transparent copy of the document free of added material If you use the latter option you must take reasonably prudent steps when you begin distribution of opaque copies in quantity to ensure that this transparent copy will remain thus acces sible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an opaque copy directly or through your agents or retailers of that edition to 90 THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE the public It is requested but not required that you contact the authors of the doc ument well before redistributing any large number of copies to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the document 4 Modifications You may copy and distribute a modified versi
157. he ze fonts from cran When using the ze fonts our enhanced version of sabon sty would look like this NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage sabon 2002 04 17 v1 0 Adobe Sabon with ZE RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp RequirePackage zefonts renewcommand rmdefault psb endinput There is a more robust solution you might be interested in if you require T1 en coded Computer Modern fonts Free Postscript versions of the European Com puter Modern fonts have been made available although they might not have made their way into every Tex distribution yet As mentioned before one prob 1 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib supported aeguill NA UR WN Ee COMPUTER MODERN AND T1 ENCODING 23 FONTS ENCODING NATIVE SUPPORTED CM OT1 OT1 cm Blue Sky OT1 OT1 cm Bakoma font specific OT1 AE OT1 T1 with composite glyphs ZE OT1 T1 with composite glyphs EC TC T1 TS1 T1 TS1 CM super 8a T1 TSL T2A T2B T2C X2 LM font specific T1 TSL LY1 QX1 TABLE 2 Computer Modern fonts and encodings lem with or1 encoded fonts is that they rely on composite glyphs which break searching for words containing accented letters in Ppr files Both the az and the ze fonts although they enable Tex to hyphenate words containing accented letters properly still suffer from this particular problem as they are based on oT1 encoded fonts internally It is highly advisable to switch to a real
158. homepage http people mech kuleuven ac be bruyninc Homepagina van Dhr Bruyninckx heftig voorstander van de open source gedachte in Vlaanderen http people mech kuleuven ac be bruyninc ictvisie html ICT visie van Dhr Bruyninckx pleidooi voor open formaten en open software http theory uwinnipeg ca localfiles infofiles teTeX Veel Engels talige links en vooral info over TEX maar vooral over LaTEX http www aaxnet com editor edit029 html office About conversion of Word documents MAPS commun ity Kees van der Laan Hunzeweg 57 9893 PB Garnwerd Gr BachoTgX2003 The Netherlands cgl hetnet nl as of old and some more http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan abstract A partial report of GUST s 11 meeting at Bachotek Poland is given It is incomplete because could not understand most of the Polish contributions and skipped the LaT x day It reflects just of one of the threads through BachoTeX03 s life A question is raised can the TEX world follow with pdfTEX the evolving PDF standard keywords BachoTEX2003 GUST Poland Motivation Nobody asked me to write a trip report so I just did it for myself to increase awareness to remember better what I have picked up to ponder aloud about ideas which popped up and not to let it fall into oblivion not to let it go with the wind Moreover it was interesting to experience with this report as a pdf IEX e paper with links to WWW addresses e g fo
159. ibuted to individuals with little or no involvement support of lugs Erik Frambach e g LaTEX emIEX CTAN Web2c ConTeXt Omega fpTEX MikTEX We don t learn from each other s mistakes There is no sense of history All too often a new lug board means that much knowledge and experience goes down the drain Do s and Don ts From the experience gained by lugs we can extract the fol lowing recommendations to lugs Review your constitution compare it to others on a reg ular basis Watch out for potential deadlocks voting rules and unforeseen events such as dissolvement of the lug Check your legal and financial position on a regular basis Get independent professional advice before it s too late read the tax man will strip you down Find the right size of your board not too big not too small so you can actually get things done Think twice before you hire personnel e g for running a lug office This could generate more problems than it will solve In case of internal problems talk to other lugs Chances are your problems are not unique Cherish your volunteers They are your most valuable assets Bold statements Naturally we don t have all the answers to all the problems However we do have several items we think would be use ful for lugs to discuss among themselves or with other lugs We list them here as bold statements Note th
160. ijn hieronder als voorbeeld weergegeven RII Licht ontvlambaar R20 2 1 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S7 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en beschermende kleding S45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddellijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Een label voor een container tot 50 liter moet minstens 150 mm breed en 74 mm hoog zijn Gewoonlijk staan maximaal twee gevarensymbolen links en de rest van de tekst rechts De symbolen zijn circa 3 cm in het vierkant Implementatie De benodigde symbolen heb ik gevonden op het internet Deze waren echter uitgevoerd als GIF bestanden van lage resolutie en hetgeen er erg lelijk uitzag Daarom heb ik de sym bolen zelf ge mplementeerd in postscript gevolgd door conversie naar PDF met epstopdf De meeste symbolen zijn met de hand gedaan De symbolen voor ontplofbaar en oxide rend zijn gemaakt met autotrace Oorspronkelijk is het label gezet als een geneste minipage omgeving Als relatieve nieuwkomer in LaTEX kon ik deze opmaak niet krijgen zoals ik het hebben wilde Daarom is het label nu uitgevoerd in een picture omgeving met daarin een parbox voor de tekst aan de rechterk
161. il j DeclareRobustCommand instyle not math al phabet instyle rel ax exfs try fami ly expandafter exfs get base f family nil 0 t 1 a t 1 a DeclareRobustCommand sustyle not math alphabet sustyle relax exfs try family expandafter exfs get base f family nil 1 DeclareRobustCommand swstyle not math alphabet swstyle relax fter exfs get base fefamily nil w exfs try family expand 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 76 EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP Adding thorough support for italic small caps is not quite as easy The problem is that the creators of the Nrss apparently did not think of italic small caps when putting italics and small caps in the same category Since both variants are on the shape axis of the Nrss they are mutually exclusive While this will not keep us from using fontshape to select italic small caps explicitly nesting scshape and itshape does not have the desired effect When nested these macros simply override each other instead of switching to italic small caps This problem is not as exotic as it may seem because italic small caps are hardly ever used explicitly Typically they come into play when small caps and italics are mixed on the same line For example think of a page header which is set in small caps containing a highlighted word set in italics or an italic section heading with an acronym set in sm
162. ill be drawn at the current level with its top aligned with send events at the same level For example suppose CTAN has to do some compu tations in order to determine if the anonymous login is allowed The computation could be modeled by a check action as depicted in Figure 3 The LalEX code for the Msc of Figure 3 is begin msc Action declinst ftp ftp client declinst ctan ftp tex ac uk CTAN nextlevel mess anonymous ftp ctan nextlevel action Check ctan nextlevel 2 mess Ok ctan ftp end msc Regions Another way to model internal activity or in activity is by using regions Regions are defined by the regionstart regtype nn and the regionend nn commands The regtype parameter defines the type of the region activation coregion which will not be dis cussed in this paper or suspension The nn parameter is MAPS Drawing Message Sequence Charts with LaTeX msc Action ftp client ftp tex ac uk anonymous Figure 3 An MSC with an action the nickname of the instance on which the region should be drawn If an instance is active e g doing some com putations this can be modeled by an activation region If an instance is inactive e g waiting for results this can be modeled by a suspension region For example the computation of the CTAN could be modeled by an activ ation region Furthermore the ftp client is inactive during this computation which could be modeled by a s
163. im about audio MP3 conversion and maybe he could have demonstrated it and I could have judged the results The results I get are insufficient maybe because my hardware is too limited Erik yes he uses a Titanium nowadays could not demonstrate it either because it seems that iTunes 3 with respect to MP3 conversion offers you the possibility to burn a CD in MP3 and not the possibility to simply convert an audio file into MP3 iTunes 4 seems to offer what I need Radek s wireless contacting the ethernet access point through the built in airport extreme did not work on the spot alas The functionality is nice and I would have liked to watch its performance Najaar 2003 community community 20 Kees van der Laan BoFs One was about the GUST file server for TEX amp Co materials o Polskiej Bibliotece In ternetowej in Polish This was in parallel with Jerzy s BoF so we were not left unattended The future of European LUGs Jerzy Ludwichowski Maybe there was a change in the program because his guidance was all about fund raising from Brussels and what sensible projects we could define for the purpose 3 Hmmm I wish him all the success he can get but I doubt it that he will succeed The reason We had great and appealing projects like NTS and we failed 4 Moreover I think that we are too narrow minded too much involved with T X s pur pose and possibilities We should have an eye for multi media
164. in a dedicated small caps font Mechanical small caps are generated by taking the tall caps of the font and scal ing them by a certain factor 1000 means full size 800 means 0 8 Since Type1 fonts scale linearly scaling down tall caps implies that they will appear lighter than the corresponding lowercase glyphs thus disturbing the color of the page However if they are too tall they do not mix well with the lowercase alphabet Optical small caps match the x height of the font This is the height of the lowercase alphabet without ascenders and descenders They blend in seamlessly with lowercase and mixed case text Depending on the typeface this usually corresponds to a value in the range of 650 750 If you scale down tall caps so that they match the x height of the font they will appear too light in running text Finding a suitable value for this is obviously a trade off We are going to use fontinst s default setting of 800 here but you might want to experiment with a value in the range of 750 800 For serious applications of small caps we would need optical small caps provided in a dedicated small caps or in an expert font For details on small caps and expert sets please refer to tutorial nr and v respectively setint slant 167 The integer variable small capsscale isa predefined variable used by fontinst s encoding vectors We could use it in conjunction with latinfamily as well The variable slant is specific to our fontins
165. in the afm file will end up in the encoding position for the numeral one in the T1 encoded virtual font When taking a look at the glyph names of hanging inferior and superior figures in the afm files of our expert fonts now the approach we need to take in order to access them should be obvious C 48 WX 469 N zerooldstyle B 39 0 431 387 C 49 WX 271 N oneoldstyle B 44 5 229 405 C 50 WX 396 N twooldstyle B 37 0 356 415 C 210 WX 323 N zeroinferior B 27 13 296 355 C 211 WX 323 N oneinferior B 84 5 240 357 C 212 WX 323 N twoinferior B 27 0 288 358 C 200 WX 323 N zerosuperior B 27 293 296 661 C 201 WX 323 N onesuperior B 84 298 240 661 C 202 WX 323 N twosuperior B 27 303 288 661 z Just like old style figures inferior and superior figures use suffixes to the re spective glyph names in properly encoded expert fonts This means that we 43 44 45 47 48 50 INFERIOR AND SUPERIOR FIGURES 61 can modify t1j etx accordingly to create encoding vectors incorporating in ferior and superior figures Hence our encoding vector for T1 encoded fonts featuring inferior figures t10 etx read t one zero since 0 is the Fontname code for inferior figures should look like this relax encoding setcommand 1c 1 2 2 setcommand uc 1 2 1 setcommand 1ctop 1 2 setcommand uctop 1 2 setcommand 1clig 1 2 setcommand ucl ig 1 2 1 setcommand digit 1 lin
166. included lS ced Sel m a jnro8x JansonExpertMT jnbo8x JansonExpertMT Bold 0 167 SlantFont jnr8x JansonExpertMT jnri8x JansonExpertMT Italic jnb8x JansonExpertMT Bold jnbi8x JansonExpertMT BoldItalic 0 167 SlantFont We do need slanted expert fonts as well though lt 8r lt 8r lt 8r lt 8r lt 8r lt 8r enc enc enc enc enc enc lt mjnr8a pfb lt mjnri8a pfb lt mjnb8a pfb lt mjnbi8a pfb lt mjnr8a pfb lt mjnb8a pfb is no need for reen lt m lt m lt m lt m lt m jnr8x pfb lt mj jnb8x pfb jnbi8x pfb nri8x pfb jnr8x pfb jnb8x pfb This is our complete map file for Monotype Janson mjn map VO 0 NNU RE WN EE VO 0 NAUWE WN EE ee NN UR WN EO 18 64 EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP v 5 The style file Our style file for Janson janson sty is based on the one suggested in section 111 3 We simply adjust the package name and the names of the font families NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage janson 2002 12 30 v1 0 Monotype Janson RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp RequirePackage nfssext DeclareOption oldstyle renewcommand rmdefault mjnj DeclareOption lining renewcommand rmdefault mjnx ExecuteOptions oldstyle ProcessOptions endinput With an expert font set at hand however we have to extend nfssext sty to support expert families NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPacka
167. ing bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en bescher mende kleding 45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag geschikte handschoenen en bescher mende kleding 45 In geval van ongeval of indien men zich onwel voelt onmiddelijk een arts raadplegen indien mogelijk hem dit etiket tonen Chemproha Donker Duyvisweg 44 3316 BM Dordrecht tel 078 6544944 2003 11 26 Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakking bewaren S16 Verwijderd houden van ontstekingsbronnen niet roken S36 37 Draag g
168. ing figures in the previous tutorial The appropriate low level commands that set the glyph go in a dedicated metric file reseteur mtx which we have to create ourselves relax metrics resetglyph euro glyph currency 1000 endsetglyph setleftrightkerning euro currency 1000 unsetglyph currency endmetrics We reset the glyph euro based on the glyph currency scaled to its full size 3 5 adjust the kerning on either side of euro to match that of currency 6 and finally unset the glyph currency 7 because there is no such thing as a currency symbol in this font In the fontinst file we include the metric file reseteur mtx in the file list of the respective installfont command right after the metrics for this font have been read This might look as follows install font bsbr8c bsbr8r reseteur textcomp ts1 TSI bsb m n We only need to do this for the Ts1 encoded virtual fonts as T1 does not include the euro symbol Apart from that the fontinst file does not need any adjust ments rv 3 Euro symbol taken from external symbol font Let s go back to our install of Sabon to see if we can get euro support for Sabon as well The font itself does not include a euro symbol at all so all we can do is take it from an external font While some other font foundries at least provide special symbol fonts containing a collection of matching euro glyphs for all typefaces that have not been
169. ing general drawing tools is that they usually do not provide libraries of Msc symbols Therefore if you have to draw many MSCs it will take much effort to get a set of consistent looking Mscs Furthermore if you want to change a parameter of the Mscs e g the width of the instance head symbols you would probably have to edit all Mscs manually For these reasons we developed the MSC macro package for LaTEX The macros in the package enable a textual representation of an MSC in a LaT X source document By compiling the LaTeX documentinto PostScript a graphical representation of the MSc is generated The design requirements for the MSc macro package were 1 The package should follow the Iru standard with respect to shape and placement of the symbols of an MSC 2 The interface of the package should be at the right level of abstraction 3 There should only be a limited amount of automatic restructuring and layout of the Mscs 4 The appearance of sets of Mscs should be configurable by an appropriate set of parameters 5 The msc macro package should run on standard LaTEX distributions User interface In this section we will briefly describe the user interface of the Msc macro package We will do this by giving examples and showing the LaT X code that produced the examples Najaar 2003 application MSC environment mscs are drawn in the msc environ ment The syntax of this environment is begin msc titlepos titl
170. ing the special t1c etx encoding file be cause there is no bold small caps font install font psbboj8t psbboj8r latin t1 T1 psbj b sl instal font psbbij8t psbbij8r latin t1 T1 psbj b it endinstallfonts bye This is the complete fontinst file for the Nrss font families psb and psbj It requires the metric file unsetnum mtx which is part of the fontinst package Metric files always begin with relax and enclose all commands in a metrics environment Essentially unsetnum mtx consists of several unsetglyph com mands which clear all figure slots relax metrics unsetglyph zero unsetglyph one unsetglyph two unsetglyph three unsetglyph four unsetglyph five unsetglyph six unsetglyph seven unsetglyph eight unsetglyph nine endmetrics You probably will have noticed that we did not create Ts1 encoded fonts for the psbj family The reason is quite simple since Ts1 is not a regular text encoding TS1 psbj would be identical to TS1 psb anyway To ensure that the textcomp THE MAP FILE 39 package works for the psbj family nonetheless we need to set up some substi tutions Since fontinst does not support family substitutions we cannot create them automatically We have to write a font definition file manually The file tsipsbj fd should like this ProvidesFile tslpsbj fd DeclareFontFamily TS1 psbj DeclareFontShape TS1 psbj m n lt gt ssub
171. is our complete fontinst file which will provide us with four font families mjnx mjnj mjnO and mjni Virtual fonts in T1 encoding are provided for all families but Ts1 encoded ones for mjnx only since they would be identical for all of our four font families anyway Thus we can simply use substitutions instead of creating duplicate virtual fonts As mentioned in the third tutorial however fontinst does not provide family substitutions We have to write font definition files manually to ensure that the lacking Ts1 encoded fonts are substituted by their counterparts of the mjnx family so that the textcomp package will work with all of them For the mjnj family our font definition file for Ts1 encoding tsimjnj fd looks like this ProvidesFile tslmjnj fd DeclareFontFamily TS1 mjnj DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj m n lt gt ssub mjnx m n DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj m sc lt gt ssub mjnx m n DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj m s1 lt gt ssub mjnx m s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj m it lt gt ssub mjnx m it DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj b n lt gt ssub mjnx b n DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj b sc lt gt ssub mjnx b n DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj b sl lt gt ssub mjnx b s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj b it lt gt ssub mjnx b it DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj bx n lt gt ssub mjnx b n DeclareFontShape TS1 mjnj bx sc lt gt ssub mjnx b
172. itional manuals when working with it THE FONTINST MANUAL Shipping as fontinst dvi the fontinst manual is the most important piece of documentation you will need when working with this guide since most files required for proper Postscript font support are generated by fontinst You do not need to work through the sections explaining all low level commands in detail but make sure that you have read the more general parts and that you have a basic understanding of what fontinst is and what it does If this manual is not included in your distribution get it from the Comprehensive Tex Archive Network cTAN THE FONTNAME SCHEME Fonts used with Tex are usually renamed according to a dedicated naming standard the Fontname scheme by Karl Berry Take a look at the outline of the scheme as given in fontname dvi and make sure you have copies of the individual map files at hand These lists define names for a large number of commercial Postscript fonts You will need them while working with this guide If the documentation of the Fontname scheme is not part of your distribution you can read it online or download the complete package from a CTAN FTP server THE LATEX FONT SELECTION GUIDE It might be a good idea to read the Latex font selection guide as well before proceeding with the first tutorial It pro vides an overview of the New Font Selection Scheme Nrss This scheme is not used during font installation but it will help you to unde
173. jnl selectfont 1 textfractionsolidus fontfamily mjn0 selectfont 2 Writing textfrac 1 2 in the input file will typeset the fraction 1 2 When looking at an expert font in a font editor you will see that expert fonts contain a fixed number of text fractions Some of them are included in Ts1 encoding and supported by the textcomp package but typing rather long commands such as textthreequarters is not exactly convenient Since there are only nine of them they are not very useful anyway With a complete set of inferior and superior figures at our disposal our macro will work for arbitrary fractions like or 13 7 Instead of using hard wired fonts as shown above it is even better to use the font switching macros provided by nfssext sty instead since they will dynamically adjust to the active text font newcommand textfrac 2 textsu 1 textfractionsolidus textin 2 What about using superior figures as footnote numbers To do so we need to redefine makefnmark This is the default definition def makefnmark hbox text superscript normal font thefnmark In order to use optical superior figures instead of mechanical ones we drop textsuperscript and switch font families instead def makefnmark hbox font fami ly mjn1 selectfont thefnmark We do not need to add additional braces in this case since hbox will keep the font change local Using our new font switching macros this
174. kebox 29 29 includegraphics width 29mm LowerSymbol1 put 5 4 5 makebox 29 5 textbf textsc scriptsize LowerText put 35 62 parbox t 62mm t 60mm huge textbf Chemname scriptsize textbf Contains Codenumber rule 2pt 60mm 5pt setlength leftmargini 0pt vspace 7pt begin description setlength itemsep 0pt setlength topsep 0pt setlength parskip 1pt RSsentences end description vfill rule 2pt 60mm 5pt tiny Firma hfill filedate end picture 119 end document Het resultaat ziet eruit zoals verkleind weergegeven in figuur 1 Een LaTEX voorbeeld bestand en de bijbehorende postscript bestanden zijn te vinden onderaan op de software pagina van mijn website Op het moment dat ik dit schrijf is de laatste versie chemlabels 20030208 tar gz 2 http www xs4all nl rsmith software 48 MAPS Labels voor gevaarlijke stoffen met LaTeX LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK LICHT ONTVLAMBAAR SCHADELIJK Ethanol Bevat ethanol 5 methanol 1322 501 33801 R11 Licht ontvlambaar R20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing opname door de mond en aanraking met de huid R68 20 21 22 Schadelijk bij inademing aanraking met de huid en opname door de mond zijn onherstelbare effecten niet uitgesloten S07 In goed gesloten verpakk
175. ks whether its parent should ignore following white space The separator is used by such elements as author which may generate a comma or the word and between consecutive elements By default it is set to relax A parent element should give it a suitable definition to be used by its children and reset it to the default when it finishes Which element is next ConTEXt s XML parsing is event based This means that the parser generates events such as the start or stop of an element and calls the associated actions During the actions one only sees the current event One cannot look back at past events except for the data that one saved One can certainly not look forward to check which elements follow In contrast XSLT is tree based That means that one can scan all elements preceding and following in the formatting commands of an element Event based parsing may present serious problems to the programmer Is there a title An abstract may but need not have a title When there is no title I want to print the default title Abstract Because of the event based nature of the parse one cannot at the start of the abstract look forward to see if a title will follow One can only try to find a future event at which one may safely conclude that there is no title if one has not yet seen a title In an abstract the optional title may be followed by three types of element para simpara and formalpara When any of these elements is star
176. l Polish bonfire songs Sveta even talked about a BachoTEX hymn Katia has promised to send me in PDF one of the Polish songs typeset in Latin Modern of course along with an English translation which P11 put on my WWW site next to the already available Russian songs Other practicalities are for example to be able to understand the Najaar 2003 community community 18 Kees van der Laan Installing PostScript fonts for TEX Janusz Nowacki It was obviously meant for a PC environment not aimed at people like me the Mac ies I got it that he summarized the files involved tfm pfb enc map fd sty and what to do where meaning what these files should contain and where they should be stored and under what name Moreover he used BoP s TOIL ie the Type One Installing UtiLity I like it when people write down the results after one has found one s way through the mass So the installation and mixed use of new fonts in TEX is still a nuisance not yet solved in an easy way I presume Anecdote Janusz has the reputation of not understanding nor speaking English but since The EuroTpxX at Kerkrade since his lecture supported by slides e paper in English he has proven that Polish TEX ies improve on themselves So Janusz rehearse on it another time if it is not too cumbersome Latin Modern or an abundant extension of the Computer Modern family by accented characters using MetaType1 Bogus aw Jackowski It was all about
177. ldstyle Warning missing glyph fiveoldstyle Warning missing glyph sixoldstyle Warning missing glyph sevenoldstyle Warning missing glyph eightoldstyle Warning missing glyph nineoldstyle Warning missing glyph angbracketleft Warning missing glyph angbracketright Warning missing glyph Omegainv Warning missing glyph bigcircle Warning missing glyph Omega Warning missing glyph arrowup Warning missing glyph arrowdown Warning missing glyph born Warning missing glyph divorced Warning missing glyph died Warning missing glyph leaf Warning missing Warning missing yph married yph musicalnote 14 THE BASICS Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing yph hyphendblchar yph dollaroldstyle yph centoldstyle yph colonmonetary Warning missing glyph won Warning missing glyph naira Warning missing glyph guarani Warning missing glyph peso Warning missing glyph lira Warning missing glyph recipe Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing Warning missing yph interrobang yph interrobangdown yph dong yph pertenthous
178. led like the upright one 1 Latex does not really care about the name of the font or the foundry This argument simply defines the code that identifies the font within the Nrss 2 In fact the more appropriate name would be regular because medium is a moderate bold weight with the Nrss code mb 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 THE LATINFAMILY MACRO REVISITED 29 installfont psbro8c psbro8r textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m s1 install font psbri8c psbri8r textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m it We repeat 23 25 for the bold fonts install font psbb8c psbb8r textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b n instal font psbbo8c psbbo8r textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b s install font psbbi8c psbbi8r textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b it HO H0O Finally we close the install environment and terminate endinstallfonts bye 11 2 The latinfamily macro revisited Note that our fontinst file is not strictly equivalent to the latinfamily macro but rather stripped down to the most useful parts with respect to typical Post script fonts Essentially we did not create any font description files for the raw Tex Base 1 encoded fonts and we dropped or1 encoding If you are curious you should be able to reconstruct all the steps taken by latinfamily when looking at the log file created by fontinst while keeping our file in mind Here are the relevant lines from the log file after running latinfamily on the basic Sabon set Only lines begi
179. lent are not considered part of the section titles M Delete any section entitled Endorsements Such a section may not be in cluded in the modified version N Do not retitle any existing section to be entitled Endorsements or to con flict in title with any invariant section o Preserve any warranty disclaimers If the modified version includes new front matter sections or appendices that qualify as secondary sections and contain no material copied from the document you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant To do this add their titles to the list of invariant sections in the mod ified version s license notice These titles must be distinct from any other section titles You may add a section entitled Endorsements provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your modified version by various parties for example statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard You may add a passage of up to five words as a front cover text and a pas sage of up to 25 words as a back cover text to the end of the list of cover texts in the modified version Only one passage of front cover text and one of back cover text may be added by or through arrangements made by any one entity If the document already includes a cover text for the same cover previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are ac
180. lijker dan Vi Referenties 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 http www gnu org directory all Lijst van vrije software http www gnu org home nl html Nederlandstalige gnu site Michel Goossens Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin The LaTeX companion Addison Wesley 1994 http people mech kuleuven ac be bruyninc efficiente ict ach tergronden Argumentatie waarom open standaarden te verkiezen zijn boven propri taire in het uitwisselen van documenten Helmut Kopka and Patrick W Daly A guide to LaTeX2e Document Preparation for Beginners and Advanced Users Addison Wesley third edition 1999 Leslie Lamport LaTeX a document preparation system Addison Wesley second edition 1994 http ludit kuleuven be software latex Introductiepagina LaT X van de K U Leuven met heel wat interessante links voor newbies http www northernjourney com opensource newbies newb020 html Intro ductie voor LaTEX newbies die gebruik maken van linux http www win tue nl latex documentation html Uitgebreide Nederlands talige documentatie over LaTpx http www ntg nl maps electromaps html Elektronische versie van het ledenblad van de NTG degelijke info http www ntg nl whatislatex html Wat is LaT X http www ntg nl mail html Bekende site van de Nederlandstalige Tex Gebruikersgroep http www openoffice org OpenOffice
181. lled expert fonts containing lots of special characters will not be discussed We confine ourselves to fonts containing the Latin alphabet with ac cents used in Western Europe Furthermore we have in stalled all fonts within a TEX Live 7 installation on the Linux operating system But the procedures should be sim ilar on any TEX system which adheres to the TEX Directory Standard A very good book on the subject of installing fonts for use with TEX and LaT X is Alan Hoenig s TEX un bound 5 We have not read it completely but what we have read indicates this book goes into quite some depth on explaining the issues with installing fonts for use with TeX Unfortunately it is a rather expensive book and when you have spent a lot of money on acquiring a set of nice new fonts you do not want to spend another substantial amount of money on a 580 page book And you definitely do not want to spend a few days reading and trying to un derstand that book to be able to use your fonts with your favorite typesetting software Najaar 2003 Fortunately there is another document available An ex cellent guide is Philipp Lehman s guide 7 Maybe its best feature is that it is available for free You can simply down load it from CTAN 3 It certainly is a very good guide to help you installing and using your fonts without having to read hundreds of pages Both Alan Hoenig and Philipp Lehman recommend the use of the programme fontin
182. llrawfont macro in our fontinst file This macro does not build a virtual font but rather sets up a raw Tex Base 1 encoded font for use under Latex Here are some crucial points we would have to keep in mind when writ ing a fontinst file that does exactly what latinfamily would do the macro installrawfont is used in conjunction with 8r mtx instead of latin mtx the encoding file is obviously 8r etx in this case Creating oT1 encoded vir tual fonts requires latin mtx and ot1 etx You will also notice that in ad dition to otic etx and tic etx fontinst used encoding files like ot 1i etx and t1i etx when creating italic virtual fonts For T1 encoding t1 etx and t1i etx are equivalent because t1i etx reads t1 etx internally hence we did not use t1i etx in our fontinst file The situation is the same with ts1 etx and tsti etx For oT1 encoding however the difference is crucial because this encoding differs depending on the shape the upright shape features a dollar symbol while the italic shape puts an italic pound symbol in the slot of the dollar This is yet another idiosyncrasy of 071 11 3 Map files revisited With all of that in mind let s now go back to the dvips map file from the first tutorial and take another look at it The meaning of the reencoding and slanting instructions should be much clearer now psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb psbri8r Sabon Italic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont
183. logische nood aan is niet als n of ander bedrijf verwacht er commercieel voordeel uit te halen Daarom ook is LaTgX zalig om mee te werken Je bent gerust dat 1 heel veel mensen werken met de software en je dus altijd wel ergens terecht kan met je vragen 2 de software wordt uitgebreid en onderhouden 3 LaT X is opgenomen in de lijst van de vrije software 1 Meer info over vrije software is te vinden op 2 4 Je kan het eens nalezen op 15 Op 4 krijg je nog enkele argumenten mee voor efficient ICT gebruik die ook deels ook opgaan voor de LaT X gebruiker Ook op 8 krijg je argumenten mee waarom een pakket als LaTEX te verkiezen is boven een WYSIWYG 5 Voor extra argumenten zie supra het internetartikel van Dhr Bruyninckx 6 Naast open standaarden bestaat er inderdaad ook open content Een thema dat we hier buiten beschou wing laten MAPS LalpX een newbie ervaring 3 zonder de bedoeling om je financieel uit te knijpen als een citroen 4 en je weet dat je kennis van het pakket niet wegge rodeerd zal zijn na de volgende 0 zo noodzakelijke update It takes guts to LaTeX LaTEX is niet voor iedereen Volgens mij zijn er enkele basisvoorwaarden waaraan je moet voldoen om met LaT X te kunnen werken Voor alle duidelijkheid spreek hier enkel vanuit mijn ervaring met TETEX de UNIX variant 1 WYSIWYG geeft je het gevoel alsof je controle hebt over de software en je eindpro duct dat je maakt Je hebt een ins
184. mary to create subdirectories for the foundry and for each font family You can take the names of these subdi rectories from the Fontname scheme as well although this is not a requirement The standard directory name for the foundry is given in the file supplier map the standard name for the typeface in typeface map Here are the relevant lines from both files for Sabon p adobe r Adobe samp p for PostScript sb sabon Sabon b ClassicalGaramondBT The font description files fd for Latex go in a subdirectory of tex latex The exact location is up to you but I recommend using the foundry typeface scheme as well We do not need the directories dvips pdftex and xdvi at this point but we are going to use them later Now we create all directories and copy the files into the local tree as follows cp afm usr local share texmf fonts afm adobe sabon cp tfm usr local share texmf fonts tfm adobe sabon cp pfb usr local share texmf fonts typel adobe sabon cp vf usr local share texmf fonts vf adobe sabon cp fd usr local share texmf tex latex adobe sabon All files left in the working directory will not be used any more and may be deleted 1 4 Creating map files All the files that Tex and Latex need in order to use Sabon are now available At this point we could create a perfectly valid pvi file with the right amount of blank space for every glyph but we would not see a single glyph when looking at a pv1 preview N
185. me aspects of the imple mentation of the MSC macro package Drawing Mscs In general and as shown by the examples of the previous sections an MSC consists of a number of vertically oriented instances that are connected by horizont ally oriented messages So the width of an msc is related to the number of instances and the height of an Msc is related to the number of ordered messages Based on this observation there are several implementations possible To define the width of an Msc we could use an additional parameter of the msc environment However this strategy has some drawbacks First of all an extra parameter the horizontal position is required to declare instances Furthermore this parameter probably changes whenever a new instance is added to the left of an existing instance Finally the user should calculate the value of this parameter carefully in order to get evenly spaced instances Therefore we chose to compute the width of an MSC based on the number of instances declared by the user and the user definable instdist length that defines the distance between instances This decision does not violate requirement 3 of Section no automatic structuring and layout since the number of instances is under control of the user Furthermore the user can adjust the space to the left of the first instance and the space to the right of the last instance by redefining the length parameter envinstdist The messages are partially ord
186. me of the files as shipped by the vendor After renaming we find the following files in the working directory psbr8a afm psbri8a afm psbb8a afm psbbi8a afm psbr8a pfb psbri8a pfb psbb8a pfb psbbi8a pfb We can now begin with the installation process 1 2 Using fontinst Since writing a fontinst file can be quite a time consuming thing to do fontinst provides a special macro which is able to deal with standard scenarios like this one You can look up the latinfamily command in the fontinst manual to understand what it does in detail For our situation it will suffice to say that it is able to recognize the standard fonts we provide by their file name hence the need for strict adherence to the Fontname scheme in this case Fontinst will create all metric and auxiliary files required by Latex without further directions in the form of lower level commands Therefore our fontinst file is as simple as it can get 1 The fourth column may also prove helpful it indicates the number of the Adobe font package to which this font belongs This number will save you a lot of time if you are trying to locate updated metric files for a font on Adobe s FTP server since the files are sorted by package number there 12 THE BASICS input fontinst sty latinfamily psb bye After loading fontinst 1 we simply call the Latinfamily macro with the base of the file names the foundry code plus the typeface code as the first argument 2 The s
187. ming them in this way greatly simplifies the use of fontinst later We need to create a temporary directory with all re named files in them We also need a special driver file for fontinst It has to look exactly like the one shown in figure 2 and it could be named drv fev tex We then run fontinst in the temporary directory with the command tex drv fev This creates a lot of files We now need to compile the metric and virtual fonts This is done by running the programme pltotf on all files with extension pl and by running the programme vptovf on all files with extension vpl This step creates even more files We now have almost all files needed to use Mrs Eaves within TEX Analogous to the Adobe Garamond fonts we now need a directory structure to place our files The neces sary tree is shown in figure 3 Then we need to copy all files with extension tfm into the directory fonts tfm emigre input fontinst sty latinfamily fev bye Figure 2 Driver file for Mrs Eaves Najaar 2003 fonts m dvips config tfm emigre mrseaves 5 5 fonts typel emigre mrseaves a a a E L yf emigre mrseaves tex latex emigre mrseaves Figure 3 Directory tree for Mrs Eaves mrseaves all files with extension pfb into the direct ory fonts typel emigre mrseaves and all files with ex tension vf into the directory fonts vf emigre mrseaves All files with extension fd should be copied to the direct ory tex lat
188. n St 800 800 600 600 210 215 220 225 230 210 215 220 225 230 time s time s Figure 1 Both left panels on white background are clearly shifted with respect to each other as indicated by the dashed lines that do not meet Right panels on a gray back ground show a correctly aligned system of diagrams In all diagrams the thick line represents systolic pressure variations in mmHg over a 20 s observation window in a person use sys vertical scale the thin line similarly is the time interval between heart beats in ms use ibi vertical scale the crosses represent estimates of the sensitivity of blood pressure control by the bodies baroreflex expressed in ms mmHg use brs vertical scale derived from the combined blood pressure and beat interval variability data which clearly move up and down in synchronism MAPS applications Drawing a type case in ConText Willi Egger abstract There are different environments with which one can typeset tables all of them have their advantages and disadvantages One of the recent problems had to solve was to draw a typesetter s type case from the lead typesetting era Since it looks like a table built the drawing in the bTABLE TABLE environment Introduction Formerly when text was typeset by hand fonts e g letters were stored in special drawers called type cases Dutch letterkast German Setzkasten These cases were strong wooden frames divided into four compartm
189. n a revision and at the end tag of the revision we output the whole row in the desired order I worked this out both in ConTpxt s tabulate environment and with its natural tables I decided to keep the solution with the natural tables because natural tables are more flexible and less prone to expansion errors This procedure demonstrates a powerful feature of ConTpXt s XML processing It is possible to save a node of the XML document with its subtree in other words the content of an element complete with embedded elements is saved in a variable without parsing Later one can process the saved subtree as often as one likes In between one is free to redefine the behaviour of the embedded elements In TEX s macro language this is quite normal behaviour def savevar 1 def var 1 redefine processvar processvar var redefine processvar processvar var In other programming languages it is not nearly as easy Saving a node with its subtree in a SAX content handler so that it can be processed later is not a trivial task It is a disadvantage of the above procedure that the code is not easily read certainly not if one is not used to the procedure Recently I have discussed an alternative proce dure using Giuseppe Bilotta s xdesc module It would achieve the same result but make the programming more transparent Another advantage would be that it is more easily customizable by the user Program listing and CDATA I hav
190. n instance is declared the following attributes are associated to its nick name The inside name The above name The width of the instance line A flag indicating if it is a normal or a fat instance The left center and right x position of the instance The y position from which this instance still has to be drawn The style of the instance line and The style of the region of the instance The declinst command defines the attributes using the following TEX code pattern expandafter def csname inst attrnickname endcsname value where attrnickname is the concatenation of the attribute e g abname above name and the nickname and where value is the value of the attribute For instance the declaration declinst usr User defines the following commands instabnameusr instinnameusr instbarwidthusr instisfatusr instxposusr instlxposusr instrxposusr instyposusr instlinestyleusr and instregionstyleusr For each instance attribute there is an internal command to read the value of the attribute For example to read MAPS Drawing Message Sequence Charts with LaTeX the value of the above name of instance usr one should use msc instabname usr For some attributes like the current y position there is a command to change the value of the attributes For example to change the y position of instance usr to the value y one could use ms
191. n scenario by explaining how to use fontinst s latinfamily macro to integrate a small font family into a Tex system By providing step by step in stallation instructions it will also discuss the installation procedure as a whole The later tutorials will focus on the more advanced capabilities of fontinst Be fore we begin let s take a look at an overview of the installation procedure STEP 1 RENAMING THE FONT FILES First of all we copy all Type1 fonts ex tension pfb and the corresponding Ascii metric files afm to a temporary directory and rename them according to the Fontname scheme STEP 2 CREATING METRICS AND VIRTUAL FONTS We will use fontinst a font installer that works with Adobe font metric files in Ascii format afm to generate metric files and virtual fonts Fontinst is normally not used inter actively but controlled by a Tex file Since the fontinst file is specific to a given font family we need to write a suitable file for our fonts first and run it through Tex afterwards STEP 3 COMPILING METRICS AND VIRTUAL FONTS Fontinst will generate font metrics and virtual fonts in a human readable format which need to be con verted to a machine readable form afterwards Hence we run all property list files pl created by fontinst through pltotf to create Tex font met rics tfm and all virtual property list files vp1 through vptovf to create virtual fonts vf and the corresponding Tex font metrics for them ST
192. n the above example tim ing the expansion remains an issue The command to retrieve the attribute value XMLvar entry align must be expanded before the setup command can be read by TEX That is what expanded does It is easy is it not In principle writing a mapping for an XML document in ConTpXt is simple You state which ConTEXt commands you want to use for the start and stop of each element and ConTpxt takes care of the rest Practice is more complicated certainly if you want to write a useful extensible and customizable mapping for a complicated DTD In the fol lowing sections I discuss a number of noteworthy features of the Docbook In ConTEXt mapping Encoding and language An XML document declares its encoding in the xml declaration at the start of the doc ument ConTpXt supports several encodings among which the XML default encoding utf 8 Correctly reading an encoding is one thing Making all characters available that can be addressed by an encoding is quite another thing Unicode and its utf 8 encod ing have brought all characters in the Unicode range currently more than 50 000 within scope in a single document At the moment many of these are mapped to unknown char acter Work is ongoing to bring more characters within reach of ConTpXt in a single document A Docbook document may declare its language in the xml lang attribute of the doc ument element The Docbook in ConTEXt module contains at the moment tran
193. n use to publish their meetings and other events to the whole world Potential date clashes are easy to track be cause the Webcalendar can show all events of all lugs sim ultaneously New a central TEX bank account should help in min mizing international money transfers which are always costly pis New an attempt has been made to get European funding for the further development of TEX This is a joint effort of several European lugs Patterns or Lessons learned Looking back at more than two decades of lugs at work we can distinguish some recurring patterns and there are several lessons to be learned Amateurs operating on semi professional levels can de liver astonishing products But reliability and consistency are weak There is no shortage of money but not enough activit ies to spend it on There are no established procedures for requesting support from lugs Volunteers are tough to manage especially by volunteers It s not clear how the precious time and energy of vo lunteers can be managed and or supported in a successful way New lugs are mostly oriented on difficult languanges e g Indian Chinese Hungarian Vietnamese not on ap plication working field or computer system Formalities have frustrated many projects and activities However anarchy hasn t done much better Many successes in the TEX world can be attr
194. nExp SemiboldItalic 144 mjsbi__ pmnb8x MinionExp Bold 144 mjb__ pmnbi8x MinionExp BoldItalic 144 mjbi pmnc8x MinionExp Black 144 mjbl____ PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP PPP DP pmnrp Minion Ornaments 144 moor In addition to these fonts the expert package includes a set of regular weight display fonts intended for titling and display work at very large sizes Generated from the same master sources by interpolation the display fonts share the let tershapes of the text fonts while being based on a design size of 72 pt Since they form a complete set including small caps and expert fonts they are handled just like the Minion text set and we will not explicitly consider them here v1 1 The fontinst file With a very comprehensive set of fonts at our disposal we will be fastidious There will be no computed glyph shapes no mechanical small caps and no slanted fonts thus making this setup suitable for professional typesetting Note that the bold and black weights do not feature optical small caps Even though there are expert fonts for these weights they do not contain any small caps glyphs The bold weight is merely intended for applications requiring a 67 ue WN Conn a 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 68 EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP very strong contrast for example to highlight the keywords in a dictionary while the black weight of a typeface like Minion is only relevant for certain typ
195. nc looks like 0x70 Jp q r s t fu v w x y z braceleft bar braceright asciitilde notdef 0x80 notdef notdef quotesinglbase florin quotedblbase ellipsis dagger daggerdb circumflex perthousand Scaron guilsinglleft OE notdef notdef notdef Note that in Postscript encoding vectors empty slots are marked notdef We can spot the same pattern asciitilde in slot 126 is followed by three empty slots 127 129 and finally quotesinglbase in slot 130 We count the slots and add Euro in slot 128 indicated in hexadecimal notation as 0x80 here 0x70 Jp q r s t fu v w x y z braceleft bar braceright asciitilde notdef 0x80 Euro notdef quotesinglbase florin quotedblbase ellipsis dagger daggerdb1 circumflex perthousand Scaron guilsinglleft OE notdef notdef notdef 46 THE EURO CURRENCY SYMBOL After that we move our modified 8r enc to dvips base in the local Tex tree and update the kpathsea file databases by running texhash Our system is now ready for the euro Since reencoding all text fonts to Tex Base 1 encoding is part of our regular installation routine anyway the fontinst file does not need any adjustments The reencoding is performed as usual transformfont padr8r reencodefont 8r transformfont padri8r reencodefont 8r transformfont padb8r reencodefont 8r transformfont padbi8r reencodefont 8r fromafm
196. nce the latinfamily macro reencodes all regular text fonts from Adobe Standard encoding Fontname code 8a to Tex Base 1 8r when creating metric files for Tex it corresponds to the name of the pfb file with encoding 8r instead of 8a In this case psbr8a pfb becomes psbr8r psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb The second column is the Postscript name of the font Do not try to guess the right name or copy it from some map file you found somewhere on the web some time ago If your font is included in one of the foundry specific lists of the Fontname scheme the Postscript name is given in the second column of the respective table If it is not or if you are in doubt the Postscript name should be taken from the header of the afm file for every font Here are a few lines from psbr8a afm StartFontMetrics 2 0 Comment Copyright c 1989 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved Comment Creation Date Fri Mar 10 16 47 51 PST 1989 FontName Sabon Roman FullName 12 Sabon Roman 05232 FamilyName Sabon EncodingScheme AdobeStandardEncoding The relevant part is the line starting with FontName the Postscript name of this font is Sabon Roman For each font we copy this name verbatim to psb map psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb The third column of our map file is a reencoding instruction As mentioned above the latinfamily macro reencod
197. nd 6 to appendix Added revision history First public pre release featuring tutorials 1 1v Added installation instructions to section Iv 3 Added section Iv 4 Added tutorial rv Added tutorial 11 Unreleased draft including tutorials 1 and 11 95
198. nd html at the heart of 1998 and my last year s Professionals and amateurs TgXnically I also contributed IMHO but it seems that these contributions have not been perceived as I hoped for have not gained adherents as Ulrik mentioned to me However my paradigm series of notes is available at the TEX Live 6 CD ROM see directory texmf doc paradigm and who knows what more notes of mine are out there because usually I m not asked whether I agree or consider it better to unpublish All my work published in MAPS is available on NTG s jubileum CD ROM of 2001 which contains MAPS1 24 as a wealth of PDFs with search facilities MAPS issues in HTML are available on the TEX Live CD ROM 3 Sveta in her trip report in Russian paid attention to this aspect and some more Najaar 2003 community 16 Kees van der Laan to retaste the smoked sausages and ashes baked potatoes to allow the fire spitters redo their job on my retina and last but not least to hear the music again Remarkable about the participants was that quite a few are retired TgXies already are no longer active with TEX amp Co They only use TEX amp Co now and then for their pleasure while in day to day life they are not allowed to use it or just don t use it for various reasons This reminded me of one of my earlier thoughts about the lifetime of a T Xie The logistics of the organization was in good hands Jola and her team did as usual a good job all went a
199. nd in psbr8r Note that installfont does not overwrite any en coding slots when processing additional metric files it simply fills vacant slots if it finds suitable glyphs in the next font This allows us to insert the lining figures of psbr8r in the virtual font while the rest of the glyphs including the small caps is taken from psbrc8r As to the encoding vector we use the regular encoding file t1 etx in this case since psbrc8r uses standard glyph names for the small caps so that tic etx would be inappropriate There is one more thing we have to take into account adding a metric file to the installfont command also adds kerning information provided by that file The problem here is that some of the glyph names in our raw fonts are not unique since the small caps in psbrc8r are encoded and labeled just like the lowercase letters in psbr8r The kerning data in psbr8r however refers to or dinary lowercase letters Under certain circumstances misleading kerning data might thus be included in the virtual small caps font psbrc8t To avoid that we add two auxiliary files provided by fontinst kernon mtx and kernoff mtx which enable and disable fontinst s setkern command When added to the input file list as shown above this will effectively ignore the kerning data in psbr8r install font install font install font install font psbro8t psbro8r latin t1 T1 psb psbri8t psbri8r latin t1 T1 psb psbb8t psbb8r l
200. ned to at least once in your life It must be said that not only Polish songs are sung but also Ukrainean Russian and English In the early BachoTEX s we had Phil s share and last year David Kastrup treated us on some of Leonard Cohen Then I was very much surprised by Marek Czubenko who did not only join in singing the Polish Ukrainean and Russian songs but als those of Cohen Orienting competition Another off off social event was the orienting competition These competitions are quite popular in Russia and apparently in Poland Pecular Funny Tuned for the ocasion was how you could score Not only by finding the spots but also by emptying the bottle of beer bringing the empty bottle s yields 1 extra point for each bottle and a cap yields 2 bonus points Nice well done Thank you Piotr and Annual assembly I really can t tell what it was all about but big laughter there was I trust the GUST membership to decide the right things so my default in voting is to obstain Two motions were tabled explained in English and after voting accepted with one obstention To understand the words of a motion is one thing to realize the implications is another Pictures alas no sound nor video What is the value of a BachoTEX report without pictures without sound From the last EuroBachoTEX a wealth of photo galleries is available at http www gust org pl BachoTeX 2002 I guess that when you read this report the photos of the
201. nning with INFO gt run are relevant in this context as they indicate lower level macros used by latinfamily NFO gt run transformfont lt psbr8r gt from lt psbr8a gt NFO gt run installrawfont lt psbr8r gt lt psbr8r 8r gt lt 8r gt lt 8r gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt n gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbr7t gt lt psbr8r latin gt lt 0T1 gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt n gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbr8t gt lt psbr8r latin gt lt T1 gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt n gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbr8c gt lt psbr8r textcomp gt lt TS1 gt lt TS1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt n gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbrc7t gt lt psbr8r latin gt lt 0T1c gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt sc gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbrc8t gt lt psbr8r latin gt lt T1lc gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt sc gt NFO gt run transformfont lt psbro8r gt from lt psbr8r gt faking oblique NFO gt run installrawfont lt psbro8r gt lt psbro8r 8r gt lt 8r gt lt 8r gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt s 1 gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbro7t gt lt psbro8r latin gt lt 0T1 gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt s1 gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbro8t gt lt psbro8r latin gt lt T1 gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt s1 gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbro8c gt lt psbro8r textcomp gt lt TS1 gt lt TS1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt s1 gt NFO gt run transformfont lt psbri8r gt from lt psbri8a gt NFO gt run installrawf
202. not have professional staff members This scenario is bound to lead to problems as history has proven 10 Lugs growing too big to handle 2000 members should split into smaller groups Conclusion For already two decades lugs have been around to promote TEX and support IEX users They have had their ups and downs but most of them have survived in spite of the in credible advances and changes that the computer world has gone through and is still going through We are sure that in the next decade lugs should play a major role in keeping TEX and the whole TEX community alive and kicking So let s redefine and revive lug activities Koen Wybo 10 advocacy LaTeX een newbie ervaring abstract Hoe ik een LaTX adept werd argumentatie pro LaTeX en contra zijn grafische concurrenten Word en OpenOffice Inleiding Reflecterend op de weg die ik heb afgelegd om uiteindelijk bij LaTEX aan te komen kan je niet anders dan verwonderd zijn Want na negen jaar werken met diverse varianten van grafische tekstverwerkers ben ik nu tevreden met mijn prestatie die ik maak met een sim pele editor Graag vertel ik je hoe het zover is kunnen komen waarom ik uiteindelijk met LaT X werk en geef ik graag nog enkele aanbevelingen voor newbies Kleine routebeschrijving Het is gek om te bedenken dat ik zo n tien jaar terug mijn thesis heb verwerkt met een elektronische typmachine met geheugen Van opmaak was niet veel sprake Ik bes
203. nstances should be slightly bigger in order to increase the space between the activation region of the ftp client and the anonymous mes sage from the ftp client to CTAN Figure 5 shows the same MSC but now the distance between instances is increased by 10 The LaT X code for this msc is the code for Fig ure 4 in which just after the line begin msc regions the line setlength instdist 1 1 instdist is included The location where an MSC parameter is changed in the LaTeX source document determines its effect Since the Msc parameters are normal LaTEX macros or LaT X lengths the normal LaTgx scoping rules for these entities apply For example if a length parameter is changed outside any LaTEX environment its effect is visible for all msc environments defined after the change However if it is changed inside an msc environment its effect is only visible for that Msc Since there are many parameters to configure the Msc macro package there are three predefined parameter set tings to generate small normal or large Mscs The com mand setmscvalues parset can be used to change the selected parameter settings The parset parameter should be small normal or large The default setting is normal 41 application msc Regions 2 User ftp client ftp tex ac uk anonymous anonymous command successful Figure 5 An MSC with larger distance between instances Implementation In this section we will describe so
204. nt The canonical tool for typesetting any XML file is XSL FO An XSL stylesheet is used to define the desired output in terms of Formatting Objects FO The FO description can be thought of as a formatter independent layout description Then an FO processor is used to produce actual printed output on paper or as an electronic document MAPS Docbook In ConTgxt XSL stylesheets for Docbook have been available for several years written by Norman Walsh They implement a large part of the Docbook elements not all elements that seems impossible And they are extensively parametrized so that users can customize many aspects without modifying the XSL code The objective of XSL FO is one stylesheet many processors Several FO proces sors are available among which two free tools FOP and IEX FOP is a dedicated FO processor that produces output in PDF It is available from the Apache website TEX can be used as an FO processor using David Carlisle s xmltex and Sebastian Rahtz s passivetex package which runs under LaTpx ConT Xt is a prospective FO processor It already has an XML parser Mappings should be defined for Formatting Objects in the same way as I have done for Docbook In ConTpxt Future plans Currently Docbook In ConTEXt is not completely integrated with the ConTpxt distribu tion I have strictly used the ConTpXt API wherever I could and avoided to develop my own variants But I have preferred to develop this mod
205. nt pad 3 U pada m it 49 Note that the ornament macro is deliberately designed to be sensitive to the active font family When using Minion as text font ornament 1 will typeset the symbol amp When using Adobe Garamond the same command sequence will typeset instead If you would like to use these text ornaments in a font independent manner simply switch font families explicitly adding extra braces to keep the font change local font fami ly pmnx selectfont ornament 1 Which Minion font family you select for example pmnx or pmnj does not matter but it has to be a known one that is there has to be a font definition file corresponding to the active text encoding in addition to the one for the ornament font Note that since the ornament declarations are given in the style file you also need to load the respective package in the document preamble For example if you would like to typeset a document in Sabon and make use of some Minion text ornaments you might do the following documentclass usepackage minion usepackage sabon begin document Text in Sabon fontfami ly pmnx selectfont ornament 1 THE STYLE FILE 81 Apart from that you can always go back to lower level commands which merely depend on a font definition file upmnp fd and upada fd here for the respec tive ornament font usefont U pmnp m n char 97 usefont U pada m n char 49 CODE TABLES The ta
206. ntains the ConTEXt command placetable The start tag of each following tgroup typesets the previous tgroup command XMLDBendTABLE Before typesetting the left and right frames are set up The start tag of the second tgroup also sets up the top frame The end tag of the table does the same as the start tag of the next tgroup would do In addition it sets up the bottom frame of the table and closes the vbox of the placetable command The rest is careful attribute processing and issuing the required setupTABLE com mands at the right time Attribute processing generates a lot of overhead because both the attribute names and their possible values have to be translated from CALS to setupTABLE That makes the code somewhat less readable but the logic is quite straightforward Issuing the required setupTABLE commands is a precise work o The start tag of the first tgroup applies the frame colsep and rowsep attributes of the table XMLDBopentable so that they apply to all TABLEs in this CALS table The start tag of each tgroup applies its own align colsep and rowsep at tributes within its own TABLE environment o colspec elements of a tgroup apply their attributes to the whole column of this TABLE The colspec elements in the thead and tfoot elements on the other hand must save their attributes XMLDBsavecolspec they will be applied per entry in the thead and tfoot a row elements apply their attributes immediately to the whole row
207. o graphs plotting blood pressure and heart interval versus time of course it could be any signal and added the result of spot mea surements BRS to the graph The vertical scales differ for each signal and these scales must be indicated in the graph Each graph in isolation looks beautiful and a particularly nice feature is its seemingly endless scalability Blowing the graph up from a design size of 5 cm width to 50 cm width or bigger is no problem CONTEXT then performs the combination of the graphs in one column aligned vertically using the startcombination 1 2 command The METAPOST pictures have been given an invisible outer box size the so called bounding box and this is a narrow fit to the total spaced used METAPOST doesn t care about centering the actual graph area in the bounding box The graph areas therefore are not aligned vertically See Fig 1 left two panels Attempt 2 Adding the vertical scale values to the graphs that differ in width causes the miss align ment The plot areas are exactly 5 cm but the lettering sticks out on either side of it This unbalancing effect could be annihilated by adding invisible texts of equal width sticking out left and right of the graph area by an equal amount An hbox command comes to mind An hbox can be given a horizontal width In CONTEXT a framed command could also be used Don t try it however they don t work unless they are filled with something that prints thus not
208. o8r MrsEavesBold 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt fevb8a pfb fevr8r MrsEavesRoman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt fevr8a pfb fevrc8r MrsEavesSmallCaps TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt fevrc8a pfb fevri8r MrsEavesItalic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt fevri8a pfb fevro8r MrsEavesRoman 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt fevr8a pfb Figure 4 Map file for Mrs Eaves Conclusions This paper describes our experience with installing two font families for use with TEX Live It is a lot easier than we thought at first We owe of course many thanks to all the people who wrote the wonderful software manuals and tutorials to make it so practical We only installed part of the Mrs Eaves family The intention is to make the others work within TEX as well As time permits we will look into this partly as a learning experience partly to be able to actually use that font within TEX and partly to share the resulting files and experience with you References 1 LaTEX3 Project Team LaTpXz2e font selection Sept 2000 Latest edition available on line at http www ctan org tex archive macros latex doc fntguide pdf 64 2 K Berry Fontname filenames for IEX fonts May 2003 Latest edition available on line at http www ctan org tex archive info fontname fontname pdf 3 Comprehensive TEX Archive Network web site http www ct
209. on of the document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above provided that you release the modified version under precisely this license with the modified version filling the role of the document thus licensing distribution and modification of the modified version to whoever possesses a copy of it In addition you must do these things in the modified version A Use in the title page and on the covers if any a title distinct from that of the document and from those of previous versions which should if there were any be listed in the history section of the document You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission B List on the title page as authors one or more persons or entities respon sible for authorship of the modifications in the modified version together with at least five of the principal authors of the document all of its prin cipal authors if it has fewer than five unless they release you from this requirement c State on the title page the name of the publisher of the modified version as the publisher Preserve all the copyright notices of the document E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices F Include immediately after the copyright notices a license notice giving the public permission to use the modified version under the terms of this li cense G Preserve in that license notice
210. onTEXt s implementation may now be perfectly satisfactory but I have not checked this ConTpxt defines currentXMLelement which also holds the name of the current ele ment But it is only guaranteed to be valid while ConTpxt reads the XML tag Indeed the mapping of some start tags in Docbook in ConTEXt emit an egroup command which invalidates the value of currentXMLelement Ignorable white space XML has the interesting feature of ignorable white space It can be used to give the raw XML document a nice formatting and make it fairly readable It did not exist in SGML As a consequence SGML documents may be practically unreadable in an ASCII editor For applications that read the DTD this feature is rather clear white space in elements whose content may only consist of elements is ignorable For example when the content model of a section only contains paragraphs all white space that surrounds the paragraphs is ignorable Applications like ConTpxXt that do not read the DTD must resort to other means to find out whether white space is ignorable or not I have introduced a feature that is similar to the mechanism used in XSLT One can declare that an element preserves white space with the command defineXMLDBpreservespace 1 and that it ignores white space with the command defineXMLDBstripspace 1 For these declarations to work the elements should be on the context stack and they and their children should use the command XMLDBdospaces a
211. onTpxXt s XML capabilities that I could not resist and gave it a start As an added benefit I would become more familiar with the Docbook DTD When I started I certainly was aware that this would not be a small task Docbook is such a large DTD allowing its authors to use the hundreds of I http www oasis open org docbook 2 http sourceforge net projects docbook 3 http www miwie org docbookinfo html MAPS Docbook In ConTgxt elements in innumerable combinations But only while the project evolved did it become evident to me how large it really is Michael Wiedmann who is interested in all possible tools to render Docbook docu ments heard about the project soon after I started it He made several contributions His support and interest helped me to continue through the difficult phase when a project is no longer new but you do not yet have anything really usable and you know all too well how much work still has to be done Now a year later I have some sort of an answer as to how it is possible to program ConTEXt s XML capabilities in TEX macros Theoretically TEX macro programming is complete is it called NP complete Hans Hagen is one of the few programmers who can turn this theory into practice I also have a working XML mapping for DocBook documents in ConTEXt which I call Docbook In ConTpxt DIC It contains good layout instructions for a number of oft used elements in their more common combinations Running Doc
212. ont lt 8r enc lt psbrc8a pfb psbrij8r Sabon ItalicOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbrij8a pfb psbbj8r Sabon BoldOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbj8a pfb psbbij8r Sabon BoldItalicOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbij8a pfb psbro8r Sabon Roman 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb psbbo8r Sabon Bold 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb psbrco8r Sabon RomanSC 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbrc8a pfb psbboj8r Sabon BoldOsF 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbj8a pfb u1 3 The style file With two Sabon families at hand we might want to update sabon sty to make them readily available We add the two options oldstyle and lining for the respective font families 6 7 and make hanging figures the default 8 Loading the package with the option oldstyle or without any option will set up psbj as the default roman family while using the lining option will make it select psb instead It might also be handy to have dedicated text commands to switch between the two figure sets Since such commands will need to work with all font families anyway let s put them in a stand alone style file nfssext sty and load that in sabon sty 5 NeedsTeXFormat LaTex2e ProvidesPackage sabon 2002 05 12 v1 1 Adobe Sabon RequirePackage T1 fontenc R
213. ont lt psbri8r gt lt psbri8r 8r gt lt 8r gt lt 8r gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt i t gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbri7t gt lt psbri8r latin gt lt 0T1i gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt i t gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbri8t gt lt psbri8r latin gt lt T1li gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt i t gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbri8c gt lt psbri8r textcomp gt lt TS1i gt lt TS1 gt lt psb gt lt m gt lt i t gt NFO gt run transformfont lt psbb8r gt from lt psbb8a gt NFO gt run installrawfont lt psbb8r gt lt psbb8r 8r gt lt 8r gt lt 8r gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt n gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbb7t gt lt psbb8r latin gt lt 0T1 gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt n gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbb8t gt lt psbb8r latin gt lt T1 gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt n gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbb8c gt lt psbb8r textcomp gt lt TS1 gt lt TS1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt n gt lt lt lt lt lt lt NFO gt run installfont lt psbbc7t gt lt psbb8r latin gt lt 0T1c gt lt 0T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt sc gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbbc8t gt lt psbb8r latin gt lt T1lc gt lt T1 gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt sc gt NFO gt run transformfont lt psbbo8r gt from lt psbb8r gt faking oblique NFO gt run installrawfont lt psbbo8r gt lt psbbo8r 8r gt lt 8r gt lt 8r gt lt psb gt lt b gt lt s 1 gt NFO gt run installfont lt psbbo7t gt lt psbbo8r lat in gt
214. ont and assign the glyph Euro to a valid encoding position The standard procedure we have been pursuing in this guide involves reencoding all fonts to Tex Base 1 encoding anyway precisely 43 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 44 THE EURO CURRENCY SYMBOL because of cases like this one By reencoding all base fonts to Tex Base 1 encod ing we ensure that all glyphs our virtual fonts rely on are properly encoded in the raw fonts we use as their basis But we have to keep in mind that older versions of Tex Base 1 encoding did not include the euro symbol either The pre vious release of fontinst version 1 8 came with an encoding vector that is not suitable for our situation for this very reason You can verify that by running the file 8r etx through Latex to create a documented listing of the encoding vector as follows latex 8r etx Now take a look at the pv1 file 8r dvi if the version number of this file is 1 801 dated June 29 1998 it does not include the euro symbol The best way to solve this problem is updating fontinst to the latest release which ships with an up dated encoding vector After that you can install the fonts as usual Note how ever that you will need a matching version of 8r enc as well so that dvips and pdftex can use the symbol This file is distributed separately and not included in the fontinst release In the following we will create our own updated ver sions of 8r et
215. ontFamily T1 ptm Voor de Maps Times en Frutiger fontfamilie staat daar nu DeclareFontFamily LY1 ptfs rpcode font 120 rpcode font 100 rpcode font 100 rpcode font 50 rpcode font 50 lpcode font 96 100 quoteleft rpcode font 39 100 quoteright lpcode font 147 250 quotedblleft rpcode font 148 250 quotedblright rpcode font 150 150 endash rpcode font 151 100 emdash 60 Elke regel definieert een linker lpcode of rechter rpcode protrude faktor voor n teken uit n lettertype In de DeclareFontFamily en DeclareFontShape macro s staat font voor het font waar we het nu over hebben Het teken wordt aangeduid met zijn plaats in de encoding vector Bovenstaand voorbeeld is voor texnansi encoding voor de meer gangbare T1 encoding zou dat moeten zijn DeclareFontFamily T1 rpcode font 120 rpcode font 100 rpcode font 100 rpcode font 50 rpcode font 50 lpcode font 96 100 quoteleft rpcode font 39 100 quoteright lpcode font 16 250 quotedblleft rpcode font 17 250 quotedblright rpcode font 21 150 endash rpcode font 22 100 emdash Als je een echte fijnproever bent of een erg buitenissig let tertype hebt dan zal het wel eens de moeite lonen om per lettertype protrude factors te defini ren maar zover ben ik niet gegaan Het is ook wel de moeite om protrude factors te defini ren voor letters zoals de T en
216. ontShape TS1 pmnw m n lt gt ssub pmnx m n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnw m sc lt gt ssub pmnx m n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnw m s1 lt gt ssub pmnx m s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 pmnw m it lt gt ssub pmnx m it DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape TS1 endinput THE FONTINST FILE sb n sb sc lt sb s1 lt sb it lt b n b sc lt b s1 lt b it lt eb n eb sc lt eb s1 lt eb it lt bx n bx sc lt bx s1 lt bx it lt pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw pmnw H gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt pmnw 2 EN A A 7 For the pmn0 family ProvidesFile ts1pmn0 fd DeclareFontFamily TS1 pmn0 DeclareFontShape TS1 DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFontShape DeclareFont
217. or the additional fonts found in the sc amp osr package psbrc8r Sabon RomanSC TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbrc8a pfb psbrij8r Sabon ItalicOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbrij8a pfb psbbj8r Sabon BoldOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbj8a pfb psbbij8r Sabon BoldItalicOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbij8a pfb In addition to this we need slanted versions of the new fonts For the bold osf font this is obvious Since regular weight hanging figures are found in the small caps font we need a slanted version of this font as well to provide matching figures for the slanted shape of the psbj family This leads us to the slanted small caps variant psbrco8r Sabon RomanSC 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbrc8a pfb psbboj8r Sabon BoldOsF 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbj8a pfb This is the complete map file psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb 1 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex doc fntguide pdf VO 0 INU LNE 40 OPTICAL SMALL CAPS AND HANGING FIGURES psbri8r Sabon Italic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbri8a pfb psbb8r Sabon Bold TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb psbbi8r Sabon BoldItalic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbi8a pfb psbrc8r Sabon RomanSC TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeF
218. os for Generic TEX User s Guide available at every CTAN site CTAN graphics pstricks 1993 43 Roland Smith rsmith xs4all nl 44 toepassing Labels voor gevaarlijke stoffen met LaTeX abstract Volgens Europese regelgeving 67 548 EEC is men verplicht om verpakkingen voor gevaarlijke stoffen te voorzien van labels die bepaalde informatie moeten bevatten Met behulp van het labels package en een aantal in postscript geschreven pictogrammen is het mogelijk deze labels zelf te maken keywords gevaarlijke stoffen labels 67 548 EEC latex Inleiding Volgens de EG richtlijnen moeten gevaarlijke stoffen en preparaten op de verpakking ge kenmerkt worden Als men zulke stoffen koopt zijn ze door de leverancier van een label volgens de richtlijnen voorzien Als men ze vervolgens overhevelt in een andere verpak king moet men deze zelf van een dergelijk label voorzien Er zijn programma s verkrijgbaar voor het maken van zulke labels Maar door het relatief kleine markt ervoor is deze software vaak niet zo goed van kwaliteit en relatief kostbaar Het bedrijf waar ik werkzaam ben had voor het maken van deze labels een DOS programma dat niet meer aan de praat te krijgen was onder windows Een zoektocht naar alternatieven leverde alleen een veredeld tekenprogramma op waarbij je ook een speciale kleurenprinter moest kopen of speciale voorbedrukte labels Dit programma kon ook niet overweg met de database van stoffen die we voor het
219. ote that Tex itself is completely indifferent to the actual font files It will only use the metrics in the tfm files without accessing the glyph outlines Rendering or embedding fonts is at the responsibility of the application which displays the pvr file or processes it further in order to generate Postscript pdftex is a special case because it combines the roles of Tex and of a Ppr driver All of these applications need to know which fonts to use This information is provided in map files which map font metrics to font outlines We will deal with the three most popular applications the Post script driver dvips the pv1 viewer xdvi and pdftex All of them need to be provided with a suitable map file For dvips the syntax of this file is explained in detail in the dvips manual For pdftex it is is explained in the pdftex manual and for xdvi in the documentation that comes with the source distribution Fortunately xdvi and pdftex are capable of reading dvips s map files to a certain 1 http www radicaleye com dvipsman CREATING MAP FILES 17 extent If written with a little bit of care dvips pdftex and xdvi can share the same map file This section will explain how to do that Let s take a look at the first line of what will become psb map our map file for Sabon The first column indicates the name of the raw Tex font without any file extension psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb Si
220. oude programma hadden aangelegd Aangezien we al de beschikking hebben over een kleuren laserprinter heb ik de labels in LaTEX 2 te gemaakt Inhoud en opmaak van een label Deze labels moet bepaalde informatie bevatten handelsnaam van de stof of het preparaat naam van de gevaarlijke componenten gevarensymbolen R en S zinnen naam en adres van de leverancier Deze informatie is te vinden op het veiligheidsinformatieblad volgens 93 112 EEG Elke leverancier van gevaarlijke stoffen is verplicht een dergelijk informatieblad te beschikking te stellen De gevarensymbolen zijn ondermeer het bekende doodshoofd voor vergiftige stoffen en een kruis voor schadelijke en irriterende stoffen Een overzicht van de symbolen en hun betekenis is weergegeven in tabel 1 MAPS Labels voor gevaarlijke stoffen met LaTEX Tabel 1 Overzicht gevarensymbolen Symbool Kenletter Betekenis Symbool Kenletter Betekenis Ei C bijtend x Xn schadelijk N milieugevaarlijk x Xi irriterend Z E ontplofbaar A O oxiderend F licht ontvlambaar T vergiftig H i ifti 4 F zeer licht ontvlambaar AR T zeer vergiftig De term R en S zinnen staat voor de risks en safety aanbevelingen Dit zijn een aantal standaard zinnen vertaald in alle Europese talen die aanduiden wat de risico s van een bepaalde stof zijn en hoe je er veilig mee om kunt gaan De R en S zinnen die van toepassing zijn op gedenatureerde alcohol z
221. ould omit line 2 here but if semibold fonts are available you might prefer using those as a substitute for bx 25 26 STANDARD FONT SETS Again think of m as the default weight if regular weight fonts are not available Every font family should provide mappings for the Nrss series m and bx in the font definition file If fonts matching these series exactly are not available use substitutions to ensure that the defaults for mddefault and bfdefault will work without user intervention Since mddef ault and bfdef ault are overall settings applying to all of Latex s families redefining them explicitly may cause problems Doing so should be an option not a requirement substitutesilent sc n We also add a substitution for the sc shape which will in fact be used by the Ts1 encoded families only Since Ts1 contains symbols and figures we do not need an additional small caps font for this encoding as it would be identical to the upright variant anyway However to ensure that all text commands of the textcomp package will always work even if the active Nrss shape is sc we set up this shape substitution setint smallcapsscale 800 The basic Sabon set we are dealing with offers upright and italic fonts but no optical small caps As a substitute fontinst is capable of transparently gener ating so called mechanical or faked small caps as opposed to optical or real small caps which are actual glyphs found
222. padr8a fromafm padri8 fromafm padb8a fromafm padbi8 gow H The new 8r encoding vector will ensure that the euro symbol is available in all Tex Base 1 encoded raw fonts so we can simply use them to build Ts1 encoded virtual fonts installfont install font install font install font padr8c padr8r textcomp ts1 TS1 pad m padri8c padri8r textcomp ts1 TS1 pad m padb8c padb8r textcomp ts1 TS1 pad b padbi8c padbi8r textcomp ts1 TS1 pad b it it After installing the fonts and creating a map file as usual the euro symbol will be available as texteuro when loading the textcomp package rv 2 Euro symbol encoded as currency symbol Bitstream was one of the first type foundries to update their font collection and add a matching euro symbol to all fonts When looking at the fonts the first thing we notice is that the foundry decided to encode the euro symbol as the generic currency symbol a The reasoning behind this is that you can ac cess the symbol without reencoding the font Since the generic currency sym bol is hardly ever used anyway it is no surprise that this particular glyph was dropped We could install Bitstream fonts as usual and use textcurrency in stead of texteuro to access the euro symbol but that would imply keeping the idiosyncrasies of a given font in mind while writing and modifying the text when changing the typeface not quite wh
223. perfectly possible pro vided that we use a suitable version of the Computer Modern fonts Choosing a suitable version however can be quite difficult We will discuss some typical issues related to that in the following section Alternatively we could use other T1 encoded sans serif and typewriter typefaces available in Postscript format For example here is an enhanced version of sabon sty using Helvetica phv and Courier per NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage sabon 2002 04 17 v1 0 Adobe Sabon with PS fonts RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp renewcommand rmdefault psb renewcommand sfdefault phv renewcommand ttdefault pcr endinput This setup is certainly not the most fortunate one in terms of typography but it should be safe from a technical perspective Helvetica and Courier are part of the Postscript base fonts built into every Level 2 Postscript device Most Tex dis tributions do not ship with the original versions of these fonts but they provide suitable replacements for them For our setup of Sabon the next section is only relevant if you want to use Computer Modern Sans Serif and Computer Mod ern Typewriter in conjunction with Sabon If you deploy different T1 encoded sans serif and typewriter typefaces which are available in Postscript format all you need to do is redefine sffamily and ttfamily in sabon sty or in the preamble of the respective Latex file as shown abov
224. ply resolves them For the program listing I found a simple solution It avoids scanning a whole line at a time therefore it avoids scanning the text following the end of the program listing with the wrong catcodes in place It uses obeylines and obeyspaces and it places struts at the start of a line to prevent the leading spaces to be discarded by TEX s paragraph mechanism That is all and it does the job well Hyperlinks URLs and external documents Docbook documents mark hyperlinks with the ulink element the url is contained in its url attribute If we were writing HTML documents it would be easy lt ulink url URL gt text lt ulink gt would be translated to lt a href URL gt text lt href gt and the browser would do the rest But not such an easy solution in a PDF document Links to PDF documents should be treated differently from links to other documents and relative links to non PDF docu ments are not allowed Therefore we have to analyse the URL and complete it if neces sary In ConTpxt strings can be split into parts with commands like beforesplitstring string at substring to var which splits string at substring and stores the first part in var I use this and similar commands to check whether the URL has an authority this is the term used by RFC2396 which specifies URIs usually it is called the protocol e g http and whether it is an absolute or a relative URL If a local file is specified we also check whether i
225. r Volker mentioned that layers are the new issue of Acrobat 6 which triggered some thoughts with respect to the evolving pdf standard and pdf IEX or better the niche for TEX in there TEX tools in Windows XP or how to bite a cactus Pawel Jackowski Yes this is the first time I attended a IEX lecture of Jacko s son As far as I understood he mentioned the confusing differences in how to use TEX under various OS s on a PC How to cope with it bite the cactus I could not grasp Funny and well done in the family tradition Typescripts the ConTeXt way of combining font families Hans Hagen Interesting and powerful how Hans solved the problem of mixing fonts while paying attention to the quality aspects Apparently the virtual fonts idea is not enough As of yet I have no hands on with ConIEXt but Pll give it a try once I have a new computer and will pick from Hans brains by looking under the hood How to make Jerzy love TEX again Hans Hagen This lecture was all about showing the power of PDF forms when used together with TEX amp Co The text is not entered through an editor but through a pdf form which he be lieves is a user friendly way of using TEX The user doesn t have to be aware that TEX amp Co are under the hood Hmmm I see the claim but What are the applications suited for this approach What are the limitations Let us wait and see for Jerzy s answer Hans uses for the purpose pdf IEX Acrobat based
226. r for TEX amp Co materials 7 Indexing in Polish textbooks W odek Bzyl His approach to indexing linear sorting on the fly is interesting We ll soon be able to watch the real life example of the Polish version of the TEXbook One remark however Why not just improve on Knuth by doing the sorting as sidestep from TEX ie as a subtask controlled by TEX and not necessarily done by TEX as I did Typesetting tables using Metapost Piotr Bolek An interesting contribution because he essentially introduced the concept of layers as we know already from Adobe s Photoshop to TEX amp Co Volker Schaa communicated information on the street about car parking and when and where we sould obey what speed limits 17 The GUST fileserver was also subject of a BoF 18 The magical write18 with functionality to have access to system commands from within TEX was in the early nineties opposed by Knuth 19 Well not true Knuth already in his OTR approach used the overlay idea for printing multi columns I guess that Hans created a ConTEXt OTR in order to include coloured changing backgrounds of all sorts not in the least for his e papers In PS we had the old overprint of DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL all over the page in a shade of grey I know I know one of those other missed opportunities I should have talked MAPS BachoTX2003 that there are problems to come when the tables interact with for example the text around Moreove
227. r local share texmf The relevant branches of the local tree are as follows usr local share texmf usr local share texmf dvips usr local share texmf dvips config usr local share texmf fonts usr local share texmf fonts afm usr local share texmf fonts afm adobe usr local share texmf fonts afm adobe sabon usr local share texmf fonts tfm usr local share texmf fonts tfm adobe usr local share texmf fonts tfm adobe sabon usr local share texmf fonts typel usr local share texmf fonts typel adobe usr local share texmf fonts typel adobe sabon usr local share texmf fonts vf usr local share texmf fonts vf adobe usr local share texmf fonts vf adobe sabon usr local share texmf pdftex usr local share texmf pdftex config usr local share texmf tex usr local share texmf tex latex usr local share texmf tex latex adobe usr local share texmf tex latex adobe sabon usr local share texmf xdvi usr local share texmf xdvi config The main components of this directory structure are defined by the Tex Di rectory Structure rps another standard introduced to cope with the large 1 http www tug org tds 16 THE BASICS number of files that make up a typical Tex system The appropriate locations for the different file types should be more or less obvious The fonts branch has subdirectories for Ascii font metrics afm Tex font metrics tfm Type1 fonts type1 and virtual fonts vf It is custo
228. r the photos This note is available at http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes bachotex03 pdf or with the tex extension for the source instead of the pdf extension A version with pages of screen size I will consider once I have created a BLUe OutpuT Routine for the purpose Around the meeting This was the first time I did not really contribute to a BachoTEX I attended except for me being there Roughly 60 people participated of which 6 from Holland 3 from Germany 1 from the UK and 1 from France No longer the Polish people consider BachoTEX a family affair also the Dutchies come with their spouses children and pets Michael is the example and Sveta Beer joined me again Taco and Bianca preferred to celebrate their 10 wedding anniversary at home On the strenuous way back I had as driver plenty of time to think it over while glimpsing the beautiful Polish May landscape to let the highlights flash back to ponder about might have been s about missed opportunities to resmell the smoke of the bonfire 1 Is it still needed with scrolling Acrobat Yes definitely it is much nicer Most likely I will use this approach in next year s report 2 Well maybe I contributed in the backwash by writing this report and making earlier BachoTEX reports available on my site It seems to me that I contributed similarly to TEX s life by my overview notes What is TeX and MetaFont all about of 1992 Catching up pdf a
229. r09e pmnr8r pmnr8x latin t10 71 pmn0 m instal1 font pmnri09e pmnri8r pmnri8x latin t10 T1 pmn0 n m it instal font pmns09e pmns8r pmns8x latin t10 71 pmn0 sb n instal font pmnsi09e pmnsi8r pmnsi8x latin t10 T1 pmnO sb it instal font pmnb09e pmnb8r pmnb8x latin t10 71 pmn0 b n instal font pmnbi09e pmnbi8r pmnbi8x latin t10 T1 pmn0 b it instal font pmnc09e pmnc8r pmnc8x latin t10 T1 pmn0 eb n endinstallfonts In addition to pmnx and pmnj we also add dedicated font families incorporating inferior and superior figures Since inferior figures are found in the expert fonts our approach here does not differ from the one introduced in section v 3 install fonts instal family T1 pmn1 instal font pmnr19e pmnr8r pmnr8x latin t11 71 pmn1 m n instal font pmnril9e pmnri8r pmnri8x latin t11 11 pmn1 m it instal1 font pmns19e pmns8r pmns8x latin t11 71 pmn1 sb n instal font pmnsil9e pmnsi8r pmnsi8x latin t11 T1 pmn1 sb it instal font pmnb19e pmnb8r pmnb8x latin t11 71 pmn1 b n instal font pmnbil9e pmnbi8r pmnbi8x latin t11 11 pmn1 b it instal font pmnc19e pmnc8r pmnc8x latin t11 71 pmn1 eb n endinstallfonts The same holds true for superior figures
230. ra light thin hairline extra light light book regular medium demibold semibold bold heavy black extra bold extra black ultra bold ultra black poster WIDTH es X ou aB8 RS Et py ke TABLE 3 Codes for font weights FONTNAME CODE ul el 1 m m mb db sb b eb eb eb ub NFSS SERIES ultra compressed ultra condensed extra compressed extra condensed compressed condensed narrow regular extended expanded extra expanded ultra expanded wide VARIANT B a 9 a oo s r W TABLE 4 Codes for font widths FONTNAME CODE uc uc ec c NFSS SHAPE normal upright roman italic oblique slanted small caps italic small caps upright italic outline ic 1 TABLE 5 Codes for font variants n it sl sc si uit ol CODE TABLES 85 ENCODING FONTNAME CODE NFSS ENCODING Adobe Standard 8a 8a Expert 8x 8x Tex Base 1 8r 8r Tex Text Tt OT1 Tex Tex with expert set 9t OT1 Tex Text with expert set and osE 90 OT1 Cork 8t T1 Cork with expert set 9e T1 Cork with expert set and osF 9d T1 Text Companion 8c TS1 Text Companion with expert set 9c TS1 TABLE 6 Codes for font encodings THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE Version 1 2 November 2002 Copyright 2000 2001 2002 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA o Preamble The purpose of this license is to make a manual textbook or oth
231. roph disappears Used WWW links P15 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan P15 mailto cgl hetnet nl P15 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes bachotex03 pdf P15 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes bachotexQ3 tex P15 http www gust org pl EuroBachoTeX photos PBolek imagepages image15 htm P15 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes overview pdf P15 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes texandco pdf P15 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes profsandamateurs pdf P15 http home hetnet nl1 slmorozova notes polenO3ru txt P16 http www gust org p1 EuroBachoTeX photos KBazargan imagepages image2 htm P16 http www gust org pl EuroBachoTeX photos PBolek imagepages image9 htm P16 http www gust org pl EuroBachoTeX photos TSheibak imagepages image10 htm P16 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan plaatjesmap bungalow jpg P16 http www gust org pl BachoTeX 2003 plan_bacho html P16 http www xs4all1 nl1 rkwee 20030430bachotex web 20030502Hanna_Kimia_Albert_Maarten_Kim_Peter_Sam_water_rocket_launcher_at_lake jpg P16 http www gust org pl EuroBachoTeX photos PBudzik imagepages image5 htm P16 http eoi cordis lu P16 http www xs4all nl rkwee eurobachotex web 20020503x_Stanislav_x jpg P16 http www gust org pl BachoTeX 2003 P17 http home hetnet nl cgvanderlaan notes bachotex94 pdf P18 http www gust org pl EuroBachoTeX photos MWolinski imagepages image10 htm P19 http www xs4all nl1 rkwee 2003
232. rstand certain aspects of the installation process This guide ships with most Tex distribu tions as fntguide dvi and is also available in Ppr format from CTAN Feel 1 http www ctan org tex archive fonts utilities fontinst doc manual 2 http www ctan org tex archive info fontname 3 ftp tug ctan org tex archive info fontname tar gz 4 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex doc fntguide pdf 8 INTRODUCTION free to skip the chapter about math fonts as we are only going to deal with text fonts Setting up math fonts is a science in its own right Please note that this guide was written with version 1 8 of fontinst in mind On July 14 2003 Lars Hellstr m has released fontinst 1 9 to the public The recipes proposed here should still work with the latest version but they do not exploit the new features of the new release I will try to update this guide as my time permits The latest release of this guide can always be found at CTAN Acknowledgments I am indebted to Timothy Eyre for taking the time to proofread and comment on an earlier revision of the entire guide I would also like to thank William Adams Adrian Heathcote and Adrian Burd for pointing out spelling mistakes 1 http www ctan org tex archive fonts utilities fontinst 2 http www ctan org tex archive info Typeifonts fontinstallationguide pdf TUTORIAL I THE BASICS This introductory tutorial serves two purposes It covers the most basic instal latio
233. rted in 1998 if not the way out when forced by costs 8 Or the lecturer can just team up wirelessly the beamer to his private laptop 9 So I downloaded my last years work from my site in order to put the notes on display but no way my PDF files could be watched on the screen but not printed After all I m happy that it did not work because the pdfbookmark macros contained some serious flaws 10 A village built up area is was defined by one or more houses nearer than 50 yards to the road MAPS BachoTX2003 Presentations For the conference program visit http www gust org pl BachoTeX 2003 Nice was as usual the handy map Presentation tools Nowadays pdfscreen seems to be the tool to be used Although it is handy to have the buttons on the screen I prefer hidden links which don t disturb the contents It seems that people like to show their new acquired TEXnologies nothing wrong with that and forget about the main purpose to convey the matter It must be said that pdfscreen is more modest than just Acrobat reader with its full control bar For me a hypertexted pdf file supported by the keyboard buttons for next previous end and begin and some hidden links is enough Hans Hagen seemed to have realized this earlier because in one of his screen oriented documentations MetaFun he realized tiny very tiny buttons almost hidden in the border nearly invisible because of the coloured and changing modest
234. s Bronkhorst gearriveerd en zij zou gedurende de dag een aantal portrettekeningen maken Johan Vromans schaamt zich er niet voor een hacker te zijn Hij is er juist trots op Hij vertelde over het ontstaan van MMDS zijn op Perl gebaseerde pakket waarmee mensen die echt niets van TEX weten toch door middel van TEX documenten kunnen maken Jo hans Perl scripts behappen de door de gebruiker ingetikte tekst begrijpen wat een aanhef is wat een kopje een opsomming en de brief het artikel en de offerte worden keurig in IEX gezet en voorzien van briefhoofd en paginering drukklaar gemaakt Overigens ook webpagina s kunnen op dezelfde manier worden vervaardigd De ontwikkeling van MMDS is tevens een afspiegeling van de computerhistorie want Johan Vromans werkt al aan het pakket sinds de jaren tachtig van de vorige eeuw Tijdens de lunch konden de NTG leden onderling idee n uitwisselen en aan alle tafels klonk een enthousiast rumoer Dilys Bronkhorst tekende er een interpretatie van Ren van der Heijden Sanne Dijkstra was vlak voor de lunch gekomen niet alleen omdat we er bekend om staan onze gasten in de watten te leggen maar ook om vlak voor haar lezing even te peilen wat voor volkje TEX gebruikers nu eigenlijk vormen Er was haar verteld dat het gaat om nerds met verstand van typografie maar met een andere bril op dan normale typografen Haar voordracht was voor velen in de zaal een fris en ander geluid typografen op een kunstacademie kijken and
235. s of the document then if the document is less than one half of the entire aggregate the document s cover texts may be placed on covers that bracket the document within the aggregate or the electronic equivalent of covers if the document is in electronic form Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate 8 Translation Translation is considered a kind of modification so you may distribute transla tions of the document under the terms of section 4 Replacing invariant sections THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE 93 with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders but you may include translations of some or all invariant sections in addition to the original versions of these invariant sections You may include a translation of this license and all the license notices in the document and any warranty disclaimers provided that you also include the original English version of this license and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this license or a notice or disclaimer the original version will prevail If a section in the document is entitled Acknowledgements Dedications or History the requirement section 4 to preserve its title section 1 will typ ically require changing the actual title g Termination You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the docum
236. s smooth as smooth can be Thank you The lodging in the various bungalows spread along the lakeside was OK the weather as usual the food tasty gt de GUSTibus non TEX disputandum and more than sufficient However there is one Polish soup flaki Eng tripe a gourmet of good repute which I just can t swallow but Beer really liked it The program conference organizing committees had it all well organized The LaTeX issues were concentrated on one day so plain TXies like me had a day off Thank you The proceedings were available at the spot as GUST bulletin 19 Thank you Tomek Stachek and Piotr It is a pity that it is not complete some authors could apparently not make it to submit in time The lecture room compared to early BachoIEXs has improved and is technically well equipped with a beamer connected to a PC to assist the lecturer The computers in the computer room form an ethernet and are connected by ASDL to the internet So email and browsing the WWW was available for the participants and their families Well done Thank you Jerzy Marek I should have hanged around more in that room and learn from the experience of those present For example Ronald Kwee contacted expressions of interest site where he traced the origins of the famous 20 80 rule New since 1998 is also a bar caf with terraces to facilitate socializing Poland seems to prosper The countryside is beautiful especially in Ma
237. s the last command in their start and end tags XMLDBdospaces has the effect of ig noring spaces following the XML tag if the current element has been declared to ignore spaces In practice this is only used by elements that would suffer if white space is not ignored Note that TEX itself already ignores a lot of white space viz all white space that it reads in vertical mode In the example of white space surrounding paragraphs in a section TEX would do the right thing by itself The correct functioning of XMLDBdospaces is rather subtle The following is a generic element mapping defineXMLenvironment xxx XMLDBpushelement currentXMLelement XMLDBdospaces XMLDBpopelement XMLDBdospaces The command XMLDBdospaces in the start tag is executed while xxx is the current ele ment So it ignores white space if xxx has been declared to contain ignorable white space But the same command in the end tag is executed after xxx has popped itself from the context stack So its parent is the current element and the command ignores white space if that parent has been declared to ignore white space That is indeed exactly what we want because the spaces following the end tag lt xxx gt are in the parent s content There is a class of ignorable white space that TEX refuses to ignore blank lines are converted to par commands by TEX s input scanner before we can tell TEX whether white space is ignorable or not Even this does not always mat
238. sbb8r is changed to psbbo8r psbro8r Sabon Roman 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb psbbo8r Sabon Bold 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb Note that the name of the pfb file does not change We also add a SlantFont instruction to the third column By default latinfamily uses a slant factor of 0 167 when creating the modified metrics and our map file has to indicate this accordingly Our complete map file looks like this psbr8r Sabon Roman TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb psbri8r Sabon Italic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbri8a pfb psbb8r Sabon Bold TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb psbbi8r Sabon BoldItalic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbbi8a pfb psbro8r Sabon Roman 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbr8a pfb psbbo8r Sabon Bold 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt psbb8a pfb The format suggested here is suitable for xdvi dvips and pdftex We copy psb map to the branch dvips config in the local Tex tree In order to configure dvips we locate the default configuration file of dvips config ps in the main Tex tree and copy it to the same location If the search order for all Tex trees is set up as suggested above this local copy will now be picked up instead of the global one We open this file in a text editor locate the
239. sbr8a afm are labeled like this C 97 WX 500 Na B 42 15 465 457 C 98 WX 556 Nb B46 15 514 764 C 99 WX 444 Nc B25 15 419 457 Expert fonts which provide small caps as well but do not need to follow Adobe Standard encoding encode small caps as follows C 97 WX 457 N Asmall B 15 3 467 446 C 98 WX 481 N Bsmall B 34 3 437 437 C 99 WX 501 N Csmall B 38 14 477 448 Our font psbrc8a features small caps in place of lowercase letters but it has to follow Adobe Standard encoding C 97 WX 556 Na B 10 0 546 509 C 98 WX 556 Nb B 49 0 497 490 C 99 WX 556 Nc B 49 12 512 502 This is one of the tricky parts when installing typical sc amp osr sets Fontinst s en coding vectors expect distinct names for distinct glyphs while the metric files of SC amp OSF fonts do not provide unique names for optical small caps and hanging figures The other idiosyncrasy of sc amp osr sets is specific to a few font foundries including Adobe only there is no separate upright osf font so we have to 1 The correct name of this font is psbrcj8a but we will stick to the naming proposed in adobe map here VO 0 NA UR WN EE ee U NF OO 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 THE FONTINST FILE 35 take the upright hanging figures from the small caps font when building virtual fonts 11 1 The fontinst file For fontinst we use the file introduced in the last tutorial as a template
240. serif sans serif and monospaced euro symbol respectively Note the additional braces to keep the font change local DeclareOption sans def eur eursf DeclareOption serif def eur eurrm DeclareOption mono def eur eurtt DeclareOption textcomp PackageInfo peufonts Hijacking string texteuro def texteuro eur ExecuteOptions sans ProcessOptions endinput We also provide eur along with three options controlling whether it uses the serif sans serif or monospaced euro symbol sans is set up as the default in line 19 The option textcomp will hijack the text command texteuro as provided by the textcomp package This is very handy when using the inputenc pack age with Latin 9 1s08859 15 as input encoding and entering the euro symbol directly as inputenc uses texteuro internally With this option we may also type texteuro or simply in the input file to typeset a euro symbol For this to work inputenc has to be loaded before this package Please keep in mind that this is a global redefinition affecting all text fonts We do not activate it by default as some fonts may provide a native euro symbol We also write a mes sage to the log when redefining texteuro and request textcomp in line 3 so that it is loaded before peufonts 1v 4 Euro symbol taken from external text font There is yet another way to get the euro symbol for a font that does not provide one by default Suppose we have an external text font incl
241. should be installed in your TEXMFLOCAL tree Where this actually is depends on your installation With TEX Live you can select this location when you install it In this local tree you should create a directory fonts if it not already exists with subdirectories tfm typel and vf Within each of these subdirectories a directory with the name of the foundry should be created For Adobe we use the name adobe And within each of these three dir ectories we need a directory with the name agaramon the same as the name Sebastian Rahtz gave to his pack age In the same way we also need a dvips config and tex latex adobe agaramon subdirectory in TEXMFLOCAL So we now have a directory tree which contains at least the directories shown in figure I We now need to simply copy all files with extension t m to the fonts tfm adobe agaramon directory all files with extension pfb to the fonts typel adobe agaramon direct ory and all files with extension vf to the fonts vf adobe agaramon directory All files with extension fd need to be copied to the tex latex adobe agaramon directory And finally the supplied file pad map needs to be copied to the dvips config subdirectory To make sure the TEX engine can find all these files we now need to update the search database For the TEX Live system the actual command is mktexlsr or texhash but yours may be different This can be found in the document ation of your TEX distribution After this step we need
242. slated strings for four languages English German Dutch and Italian These are used for au tomatically generated strings such as the titles of the table of contents the abstract and the index Features for each element Context stack Because an XML document has a tree structure each element in the document has a list of ancestors I call that the context or the context stack which contains the ancestors from the document root to the current element An element may push itself onto the context stack when it starts and pop itself when it finishes In principle all elements should do so In practice a number of elements omit this because they or their children do not use the context stack in their formatting During formatting the context stack can be inspected with the following commands o XMLDBcurrentelement The current element s name o XMLancestor 1 The name of the ancestor at level 1 The current element is at level o o XMLparent The name of the current element s parent MAPS Docbook In ConTgxt o the XMLdepth The depth of the context stack o doifXMLdepth l Execute the following instruction if the context stack has a cer tain depth o0 XMLDBprintcontext Print the context stack in the log file mainly for debugging purposes ConTpxt also defines the context stack I have redefined it because ConTEXt s imple mentation did not satisfy my plans Later I have simplified my usage of the context stack C
243. st to help you install your fonts Before we tried to install the font Mrs Eaves avail able from Emigre 4 we had never used this programme before But with the use of Philipp Lehman s Font In stallation Guide it turned out not to be too difficult to use at least when the installation of a simple Latin al phabet is all that is required Philipp Lehman suggests to read at least the general introductory bits of the fontinst manual 6 the Fontname scheme by Karl Berry 2 and the standard LaT X font selection guide 1 all available from CTAN 3 to acquire a reasonable understanding of the material Installing Adobe Garamond The standard font family Adobe Garamond also known as Adobe s Type 1 font package number 100 consists of six fonts These are called AGaramond Regular AGaramond ltalic AGaramond Semibold _AGaramond Semiboldltalic AGaramond Bold AGaramond Boldltalic When you buy this package from Adobe these fonts are what you get Adobe provides nice instructions on how to install and use them just not for TEX Luckily for you and me TEX and LaTEX support has already been taken care of Table 1 Renaming of Adobe Garamond files Original New Fontname Font name file name file name AGaramond Regular gdrg____ pfb padr8a pfb AGaramond Italic Qdi pfb padri8a pfb AGaramond Semibold gdsb____ pfb pads8a pfb AGaramond SemiboldItalic gdsbi___ pfb padsi8a pfb AGaramond Bold gdb_____ pfb padb8a pfb A
244. still have to join a BachoTpXx nothing can replace BachoTpx live 29 It is about last years festival in the fall pesni nashi koreni songs of our roots Najaar 2003 community 21 community Kees van der Laan to go to and from If we use one or more layers of PDF 1 5 for TEX amp Co then we can always go back form this PDF layer to TEX realizing the functionality of tex pd after another tool has been used to modify some other layer 3 The complexity of cooperating tools is decoupled as long as we don t flatten the layers PDF 1 5 and Acrobat 6 are potentially very useful Adobe Nederland in their recent Acrobat 6 introductory seminar advocated the use of layers for languages a PDF file may contain layers with English Dutch Polish translations Automatic translation just has started but the results are still very poor DVIPS Distiller T Maybe the workflow tex gt dvi pdf is better suited for pdf TEX keeping pace with the evolving PDF standard than the shortcut tex gt pdf In my e paper paradigm notes I will exercise both approaches with or without PostScript summarize the advantages and disadvantages and come up with conclusions I wonder whether we can keep pace with the evolving PDF standard in pdf IEX Apple has the same problem because from OS X onwards the screen is PDF oriented ps Conclusions As one can see it is no surprise that the BachoTgXs are well attended All th
245. t Staroffice 5 1 wist mij te verleiden om over te stappen Niet enkel om dat het gratis is maar ook omdat het een platform onafhankelijk programma is Staroffice was is immers ook verkrijgbaar voor Linux een besturingssysteem dat vanaf 1999 meer en meer mijn aandacht kreeg Gelukkig is de dochter OpenOffice 13 in zijn huidige toestand heel wat stabieler en sneller De eerste stappen met LaTpx dateren van rond de millentumwende Toen echter kreeg het een onvoldoende en heb ik het lang niet gebruikt De steile leercurve was er op dat ogenblik teveel aan de tijd ontbrak om alles op het net op te zoeken Pas nadat er bij een samenwerkingsverband met linux vrienden werd geopteerd om documenten aan te maken in LalEX heb ik het echt weten waarderen Het begin was even doorbijten totdat de MAPS LaTpX een newbie ervaring basisprincipes geleerd waren Nadien kreeg ik mijn werk gedaan Maar zoals altijd wenst men meer speciale hoofding aangepaste paginavoetnoten invoegen van afbeeldingen met tekstomloop conversie naar html en pdf De zoektocht naar meer informatie op internet en usenet was begonnen Waarom overstappen Naast de sociaal gedwongen overstap naar LaTEX zijn er meerdere argumenten waarom ik niet afkerig ben van LaTpx Emotioneel WYSIWYG mag dan als slogan vlot verkopen het werkt toch niet zoals beloofd Pagina eindes die niet meer weg te halen zijn afbeeldingen die maar niet op de juiste plaats willen blijven staan
246. t documentatie op en vooral lees ze aandachtig Heel wat documentatie is reeds online te vinden Naast de NTG site 11 kan je ook je inspiratie opdoen bij 9 en 16 Een algemene beginnersinleiding op LaT X is te vinden op 7 De elektronische versie van MAPS 10 is ook niet te versmaden 4 Wil je na de eerste stappen heel specifiek gaan werken dan zijn de boeken van on der andere Leslie Lamport 6 en Michel Goossens 3 uitstekende begeleiders Ook A Guide to LATEX 5 krijgt positieve recensies Je kan ze kopen of goedkoper bij de bibliotheek ontlenen eventueel via het bibliotheek uitleensysteem 5 Weet ook dat er bij LaT X onopgeloste mysteries blijven bestaan De meest hardnek kige W vragen die je zal blijven stellen zijn 7 Wat het uiteraard niet is omdat de specificaties niet zijn Zie ook http www openstandaarden be teksten definitie 8 Inschrijven kan op 12 g De meeste van deze boeken krijgen in het voorjaar van 2004 een update Najaar 2003 advocacy advocacy 14 Koen Wybo Wanneer verschijnt LaTEX3 Waarom werken niet meer mensen met dit systeem Waarom enkel EPS in LaTpxX en niet JPG Waar ergens op de CTAN server Waar is mijn fontmap en hoe gebruik ik nu die fonts Wat is het verschil met XML en welke is nu de beste Wie maakt die LaTEX packages en waarom Waar vind ik voorbeeld PDF s Welke editor front end is gemakke
247. t file We define it for convenience so that we can set the slant factor for all subsequent font transformations glob ally The slant factor defines how much the glyphs slope to the right It is a real OV 0 NA 10 11 12 13 14 15 THE FONTINST FILE 27 number equivalent to the tangent of the slant angle Fontinst represents this number as an integer though so we have to multiply the tangent by 1000 The value 167 9 5 is a reasonable default Any value significantly greater that 176 10 is usually too much transformfont transformfont transformfont transformfont psbr8r psbri8r psbb8r psbbi8r reencodefont 8r fromafm psbr8a reencodefont 8r fromafm psbri8 reencodefont 8r fromafm psbb8a reencodefont 8r fromafm psbbi8 D o w We start off with some basic font transformations all fonts are reencoded from Adobe Standard Fontname code 8a to Tex Base 1 encoding 8r Please re fer to the fontinst manual for an explanation of the syntax of the individual commands used here and in the following transformfont psbro8r slantfont int slant reencodefont 8r fromafm psbr8a transformfont psbbo8r slantfont int slant reencodefont 8r fromafm psbb8a Like the latinfamily shorthand our fontinst file should create slanted fonts as well These need to be reencoded and well slanted We are using the slant variable defined in line 5 to set the slant factor
248. t fonts Thus when generating the bold small caps font we use the metric file latin mtx and the encoding file t1cj etx to create mechanical small caps instal font mjnbo9d mjnbo8r mjnbo8x latin t1j T1 mjnj b s1 instal font mjnbi9d mjnbi8r mjnbi8x latin t1j T1 mjnj b it endinstallfonts At this point we have a comprehensive text setup featuring expert f ligatures optical small caps as well as a choice of readily available lining and hanging figures However there are some glyphs in expert fonts that we have not con sidered yet v 3 Inferior and superior figures Expert fonts usually provide superior and inferior figures which can be com bined with a dedicated fraction slash called solidus to typeset arbitrary text fractions like 1 2 or even 31 27 Please note that these figures are not suitable for Tex s math mode but they can be useful in text mode even if there is no need to typeset text fractions For example in this guide the footnote marks in the body text are typeset using superior figures and inferior figures are used for the line numbers of the code listings Like hanging figures we want inferior and superior figures to be readily available Therefore we will create two additional font families mjnO and mjni which put inferior and superior figures in the standard encoding positions for figures just like our mjnj family does for hang ing figures We have been using the encoding vec
249. t has the extension pdf Links to local PDF documents are created using the ConTEXt command useexternaldocument links to other documents use the ConTEXt command useURL A special problem is posed by URLs like slashdot org Is it a web server or is it a file in the current directory Cf the URL myfile html which has exactly the same pattern After the terminology of RFC2396 I call this abbreviated URLs By default they are not recognized Thus myfile html is correctly linked to as a local document while slashdot org is incorrectly linked similarly The user can switch recognition of abbreviated URLs on by setting XMLDBcheckabbrURItrue and can switch if off again by setting XMLDBcheckabbrURI false Unfortunately I do not know how to get the working directory in a ConTpXt run so that relative URLs are currently not properly completed Customization For a long time I did not pay much attention to customization Recently I received requests to make a mapping for the blockquote and epigraph elements Togeth er with that request a discussion arose on the ConTpXt mailing list about customiza tion As a consequence these two elements and their child element attribution have proper setup options viz the commands setupblockquote setupepigraph and setupattribution I am sure that more such setup commands will follow The same discussion on the ConTEXt mailing list touched upon attributes whose range of values is not constrained An example
250. t pmns8a pfb pmnsi8r Minion SemiboldItalic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnsi8a pfb pmnb8r Minion Bold TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnb8a pfb pmnbi8r Minion BoldItalic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnbi8a pfb pmnc8r Minion Black TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnc8a pfb pmnrc8r Minion RegularSC TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnrc8a pfb pmnric8r Minion ItalicSC TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnric8a pfb pmnsc8r Minion SemiboldSC TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnsc8a pfb pmnsic8r Minion SemiboldItalicSC TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnsic8a pfb pmnbj8r Minion BoldOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnbj8a pfb pmnbij8r Minion BoldItalicOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmnbij8a pfb pmncj8r Minion BlackOsF TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont lt 8r enc lt pmncj8a pfb pmnr8x MinionExp Regular lt pmnr8x pfb pmnri8x MinionExp Italic lt pmnri8x pfb pmns8x MinionExp Semibold lt pmns8x pfb pmnsi8x MinionExp SemiboldItalic lt pmnsi8x pfb pmnb8x MinionExp Bold lt pmnb8x pfb 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 42 EXTENDING THE USER INTERFACE 75 pmnbi8x MinionExp BoldItalic lt pmnbi8x pfb pmnc8x MinionExp Black lt pmnc8x pfb pmnriw7a Minion SwashItalic lt pmnriw a pfb pmnsiw7a Minion SwashSemiboldItalic lt pmnsiw 7a pfb pmnrp Minion Ornaments lt
251. tant kijk op je eindproduct Met een paar muisklikken boks je een tekst in elkaar die voldoet aan je inhoudelijke en esthetische normen Om de stap te zetten naar een programma dat je terugwerpt naar het inhoudelijke en het esthe tische voor eigen rekening neemt is veel moed en lef gevraagd Als je die stap kan maken ben je goed op weg om ook LalEX een kans te geven 2 Wil je een serieuze inspanning leveren om je teksten artikels boeken ook op esthetisch vlak een voltreffer te maken dan kan LaT X je companion zijn 3 Je moet durven in te gaan tegen de algemene mentaliteit van collega s en vrienden die grafisch nog altijd gelijkstellen met superieure programma s Bovendien wordt een Worddocument gezien als een standaard Het is bijna ongehoord om een alternatief te formuleren 4 Alsje de beslissende keuze maakt om te gaan voor jouw eindproduct en niet voor het programma waarmee het moet gemaakt worden dan ben je op de goede weg 5 Uiteindelijk als je HTML kan schrijven in een editor waarom dan ook niet La TX Startblok voor nieuwe benen Nuttige tips die je kan geven als iemand aan LaTeX begint Anders uitgedrukt om de frustratiedrempel te verlagen is het goed om 1 Op weg gezet te worden met iemand die reeds LaTeX kent 2 Of je kan je natuurlijk inschrijven op de mailinglijst van de NTG Ook in de engels talige discussiegroep comp text tex is er heel wat info te vragen en te vinden 3 Zoek eers
252. te moeten toepassen Maar dat bleek niet te werken de c optie comprimeert weliswaar meer dan n spatie tot n spatie maar ten opzichte van nul spaties blijft er dan toch nog een verschil over Tenslotte als ik dan als spuit 11 nog een duit in het zakje mag doen met een nieuw index commando vang je twee vliegen in n klap newcommand ITX 1 index 1 textit 1 want ten eerste wordt index net als in Piets tweede oplos sing nu altijd vanuit een ander commando ITX aangeroe pen zodat in de ind file geen verschillen ontstaan en ten tweede kan in plaats van index ambitus textit ambitus nu eenvoudig ITX ambitus worden gebruikt 25 Simon Pepping 26 xml Docbook In ConTeXt a ConTEXt XML mapping for DocBook documents What is Docbook In ConTgXt Docbook In ConTgXt combines two technologies that are widely used by authors of technical literature the Docbook DTD and the ConTEXt macro package for TEX It is a ConTEXt module that allows one to produce a typeset version of a Docbook XML file in dvi or pdf format It takes a Docbook XML file as input for TEX ConTpxt s built in XML parser parses the file and applies ConTEXt commands when it reads opening and closing tags Which ConTEXt commands are applied and therefore how the output is formatted is determined by the Docbook In ConTpxt module Docbook Docbook has been available since the early 1990s Over the years it has evolved into
253. ted one may safely con clude that either the title has been seen or there is no title One solution is to save the title and to redefine the mappings of each of these three elements such that they output the title or the default title if there was no title And then restore their default definitions for the following elements Another way to tackle this problem is to save the whole abstract and process it twice In the first pass we check whether there is a title During this pass all output should be suppressed In the second pass we first output the title or the default title if no title was 7 http www hobby nl scaprea context MAPS Docbook In ConTgxt found in the first pass and then we output the content Again this requires a redefinition of the three possible elements that may follow the title so that they suppress their output at the first pass The third option is provided by TEX itself not by the XML mapping We redirect the typesetting of the abstract into a vbox At the same time we save the title in the variable XMLDBtitletext which removes it from the typeset content in the vbox Then we output the saved title or the default title if there is no saved title and next we output the vbox This is the best option and I use it In a section this solution would be more problematic we run the risk of saving a large vbox Working with options one or two is also not fun because there are more elements to be redefined I
254. ter to IEX because TEX discards empty paragraphs or paragraphs that consist of white space only In the above example we could insert blank lines between the paragraphs without ill effect But a blank line between the start tag of a footnote and its first paragraph has a notably bad Najaar 2003 xml 31 xml 32 Simon Pepping effect it introduces a par command between the footnote number and the start of the text so that the footnote number is in a paragraph by itself Such harmful blank lines can only be removed by preprocessing of the XML docu ment I wrote a tool to do that It is a SAX document handler written in Java which removes all ignorable white space I call it Normalizer and it is available on my web site The output of this tool is not only good for the ConTpXt mapping Looking over it is informative for authors of XML documents Every amount of white space that is left by the tool is regarded as meaningful white space by XML parsers Is that really what the author wants Every element In principle every element should contain the following commands defineXMLenvironment xxx XMLDBpushelement currentXMLelement XMLDBseparator XMLDBdospaces XMLDBpopelement XMLDBdospaces That is it pushes itself onto the context stack It checks whether it should typeset a separator And it checks whether it should ignore following white space In its end tag it pops itself from the context stack and it chec
255. the file mjnr8x afm Note that we use the encoding suffix 9e instead of 8t for all T1 encoded virtual fonts of the mjnx family to indicate that they feature expert glyphs While the code 8t as defined by the Fontname scheme is for T1 Cork encoding 9e indicates T1 plus expert glyphs Please refer to section 2 4 of the Fontname scheme for a comprehensive list of these codes and the code tables on page 83 of this guide for additional hints installfont mjnrc9e mjnr8r mjnr8x latinsc tlc T1 mjnx m sc For the small caps font we use the encoding vector tic etx which will map the small caps in mjnr8x afm to the encoding positions of the lowercase alphabet in our T1 encoded virtual font Instead of latin mtx we use the special metric file latinsc mtx in this case The remaining virtual fonts of the mjnx family are built as expected sl thi install font mjnro9e mjnro8r mjnro8x latin t1 T1 mjnx m instal font mjnri9e mjnri8r mjnri8x latin t1 71 mjnx H m i installfont mjnb9e mjnb8r mjnb8x latin t1 T1 mjnx b n s m i n install font mjnbc9e mjnb8r mjnb8x latin tlc T1 mjnx b sc IO Since the bold expert font does not provide small caps we create mechanical ones The tic etx encoding vector will deal with that transparently but we have to make sure that the regular latin mtx metric file is read here since there are no optical small caps in
256. the user manual BM02b Motivation Several commercial and non commercial tools are avail able which support drawing or generating Message Se quence Charts However these tools are in general not freely available and often not flexible enough to satisfy MAPS Drawing Message Sequence Charts with LaTeX all users wishes with respect to the layout and graphical appearance of an msc Furthermore they often do not allow the user to include LaTEX code in the mscs Another drawback of these tools is that quite often they restructure MSCs automatically Though for simple mscs this might be what the user wants for more complex Mscs the result of automatic restructuring is usually not desired Therefore people often use general drawing tools such as xfig see http www xfig org to draw mscs How ever flexible this approach is it has some drawbacks First of all general drawing tools have and should have a low level of abstraction their interface is defined in terms of coordinates points lines polygons etc To draw Mscs the user would probably be more comfortable if the interface was defined in terms of instances messages actions etc For example if you are drawing a message in an MSC using a general drawing tool you would probably have to draw a line with an arrow head from a position xo yo to a position x y instead of drawing a message from an instance ig to an instance i of the MSC Another drawback of us
257. their inferior typographic quality composite letters break Tex s hyphenation algorithm so that words containing an accented let ter are not hyphenated beyond this letter Another problem with them is that they break searching for words containing accented letters in Ppr files In short or1 should be considered obsolete unless you need the letters of the English alphabet only But even in this case T1 encoding would be a sound choice T1 also known as Cork encoding is a more recent text encoding suitable for a wide range of Latin scripts Also known as Text Companion encoding Ts1 complements T1 by providing additional glyphs such as currency signs and other frequently used symbols like copyright or registered Ts1 is never used as the main text encoding because it merely contains symbols A user interface to the glyphs found in Ts1 is provided by the textcomp package When running the fontinst file through tex fontinst will write a lot of messages to the terminal These will include warnings about glyphs not being found since a few glyphs defined in or1 and T1 encoding are missing from the glyph set of our fonts USING FONTINST 13 usr share texmf tex fontinst base otl etx Warning missing glyph dotlessj Warning missing glyph lslashslash usr share texmf tex fontinst base tl etx Warning missing glyph perthousandzero Warning missing glyph dotlessj Warning missing glyph Eng Warning missing glyph
258. ting on be half of you may not add another but you may replace the old one on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one The author s and publisher s of the document do not by this license give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorse ment of any modified version 5 Combining documents You may combine the document with other documents released under this li cense under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions pro vided that you include in the combination all of the invariant sections of all of the original documents unmodified and list them all as invariant sections of 92 THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE your combined work in its license notice and that you preserve all their war ranty disclaimers The combined work need only contain one copy of this license and multi ple identical invariant sections may be replaced with a single copy If there are multiple invariant sections with the same name but different contents make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it in parentheses the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known or else a unique number Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of invariant sections in the license notice of the combined work In the combination you must combine any sections entitled History in the various original documents forming one sec
259. tion entitled History likewise combine any sections entitled Acknowledgements and any sections entitled Dedications You must delete all sections entitled Endorsements 6 Collections of documents You may make a collection consisting of the document and other documents released under this license and replace the individual copies of this license in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection provided that you follow the rules of this license for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects You may extract a single document from such a collection and distribute it individually under this license provided you insert a copy of this license into the extracted document and follow this license in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document 7 Aggregation with independent works A compilation of the document or its derivatives with other separate and in dependent documents or works in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the copyright resulting from the compila tion is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit When the document is included in an aggregate this license does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the document If the cover text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copie
260. to enable the map file Again on TEX Live just run the com 62 Ferdy Hanssen dvips config tfm adobe agaramon e 5 S fonts typel adobe agaramon do zi a vf adobe agaramon tex latex adobe agaramon Figure 1 Directory tree for Adobe Garamond mand updmap enable Map pad map You should look in your documentation for the exact way of doing this Now all is set to use the newly installed Adobe Gara mond font You simply need to add the line renewcommand rmdefault pad to the preamble of your LaT X document and you are in business Or you can write a simple package by creating a file containing this line followed by the line endinput naming it agaramon sty and placing it in the direct ory tex latex adobe agaramon Sebastian Rahtz did not include such a file in his package although he did include it in some other packages Partially installing Mrs Eaves For the installation of Emigre s Mrs Eaves we did not have the luxury of a ready made package Up to now we only have a very basic set of these fonts installed The entire package consists of nine fonts three of which contain only a large set of ligatures The fonts in the base package are MrsEavesRoman MrsEavesltalic MrsEavesBold MrsEavesSmallCaps MrsEavesPetiteCaps MrsEavesFractions The special fonts with ligatures are called MrsEavesJustLigRoman MrsEavesJustLigBold The only fonts we have installed for use under IEX an
261. to are taken at BachoTEX2003 but IMHO that does not really matter for conveying the impression 33 For next year I intend not only to contribute a lecture or two but also try the near to impossible to familiarize myself with the flavour of Polish and grasp the opportunity to talk to people getting rid of the missed opportunities syndrome Then there is my long standing wish to join the guitars in the night on my ocarino donated by Grizina some years ago keep fingers crossed 34 Errors in this note Do drop me an email mailto cgl hetnet nl 22 MAPS BachoTX2003 Troublesome is the handling of links to WWW addresses My macros have been ad apted such that the links are also written to a file in order to maintain a survey of what is used There is no warning whatshowever when an address becomes obsolete and the link dangling That is what modern general hypertexts entail I m afraid Photos I did not include but just hyperlinked to them This entailed a separation of the text and coloured photos Watched interactively it adds context information to the photos which is added value compared to just a photo gallery A PDF file put in a directory on my site won t be searched by search engines for META information The search engines just look for the META information provided in a HTML page It seems that my pdf TEX version based on PDF 1 2 according to the file info contains a flaw with respect to apostroph s where the apost
262. tor t1j etx to make hanging figures the default in this tutorial so let s find out what t1j etx does in detail and try to modify this approach according to our needs This is t1j etx 60 EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP relax encoding setcommand 1c 1 2 2 setcommand uc 1 2 1 setcommand 1ctop 1 2 2 setcommand uctop 1 2 1 setcommand lclig 1 2 2 setcommand uclig 1 2 1 setcommand digit 1 loldstyle inputetx T1 endencoding As you can see t1j etx is short It does not define any encoding slots All it does is predefine a few macros and use inputetx to load t1 etx afterwards The relevant part and the only point at which it differs from what t1 etx does in this respect is the line defining the digit macro To understand this mechanism we need to take a look at how t1 etx defines the encoding slots for all figures setslot digit one endsetslot setslot digit two endsetslot setslot digit three endsetslot The glyph names of figures are not given verbatim they are used as an argu ment to the digit macro The default definition of this macro as given in t1 etx looks like this setcommand digit 1 1 This means that the glyph labeled one in the afm file will end up in the en coding position for the numeral one in the virtual font and so on t1j etx predefines the digit macro as follows setcommand digit 1 loldstyle In this case the glyph labeled oneoldstyle
263. ts Small caps are available for the regular weight only we will still have to make do with mechanical small caps for the bold weight Adobe does not include a separate regular weight upright osr font The respec tive figures are to be found in the small caps font instead Our original file set looks like this sar afm sai afm sab afm sabi afm sar inf sai inf sab inf sabi aint sar pfb sai pfb sab pfb sabi pfb sar pfm sai pfm sab pfm sabi pfm sarsc__ afm saiof afm sabof__ afm sabio__ afm sarsc__ inf saiof inf sabof___ inf sabio__ inf sarsc___ pfb saiof pfb sabof___ pfb sabio__ pfb sarsc___ pfm saiof pfm sabof__ pfm sabio__ pfm After renaming and choosing the required files we could start off with the fol lowing set of files psbr8a afm psbri8a afm psbb8a afm psbbi8a afm psbr8a pfb psbri8a pfb psbb8a pfb psbbi8a pfb psbrc8a afm psbrij8a afm psbbj8a afm psbbij8a afm psbrc8a pfb psbrij8a pfb psbbj8a pfb psbbij8a pfb But before we begin let s take a closer look at the encoding of the fonts We will have to deal with some peculiarities characteristic for typical sc amp osr sets Taking a look at psbr8a afm you will see that in Adobe Standard encoding which is the native encoding of all fonts of the Sabon family the figures are D CC encoded as zero one two etc C 48 WX 556 N zero B 52 15 504 705 C 49 WX 556 None B 91 0 449 705 C 50 WX 556 N two B
264. two macros activating these families by adding 0 and 1 to the family name respectively textIn Instyle textos osstyle textin instyle textsu sustyle DeclareTextFontCommand DeclareTextFontCommand DeclareTextFontCommand DeclareTextFontCommand endinput We also add two text commands textin and textsu which activate these figures locally similar to textit or textbf v 6 Using the fonts Most features of expert font sets such as additional f ligatures and optical small caps will be available automatically when selecting the new font families Using them does not require any additional macros Lining and hanging figures can be conveniently selected by activating the respective font family in this case mjnx and mjnj or by using the style file janson sty suggested above Since inferior and superior figures are not used as regular figures they are treated differently We will take a look at some possible applications The inferior and superior fig ures found in expert fonts were originally intended for typesetting text fractions so let s write a simple macro for that To typeset a fraction we combine inferior 66 EXPERT FONT SETS REGULAR SETUP and superior figures with the textfractionsolidus macro provided by the textcomp package Accessing the figures implies switching font families locally Note the additional set of braces which will keep the font change local newcommand text frac 2 font fami ly m
265. ually not work for typefaces with true italics because the latter are an independent design 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 28 STANDARD FONT SETS To create the individual virtual fonts we use fontinst s installfont com mand The first argument to installfont is the virtual font we are going to create the second one is a list of files used to build this font These can be afm mtx or pl files their extension is omitted If multiple fonts are provided installfont does not overwrite any encoding positions when reading in ad ditional files it simply fills vacant slots if it finds suitable glyphs in the next font The metric file latin mtx is an auxiliary file provided by fontinst which should always be read when creating oT1 or T1 encoded text fonts The third argument is the file name of an encoding vector without the file extension in this case t1 etx The remaining arguments are written verbatim to the font definition file and declare the respective font in a format that the Latex font selection scheme NFss can process T1 encoding Adobe Sabon medium normal that is upright or roman The last argument is only relevant if fonts with different design sizes are available It is empty for linearly scaled fonts installfont psbrc8t psbr8r latin t1c T1 psb m sc The small caps font is slightly different Since we do not have any Type 1 font containing optical small caps we need to fake them by scaling th
266. ub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub pmnx sb n pmnx sb n pmnx b n pmnx b n pmnx b s1 pmnx b it pmnx eb n pmnx eb n 1 t pmnx sb n pmnx sb n pmnx m n pmnx m n pmnx m s1 pmnx m it pmnx sb n pmnx sb n 1 t pmnx sb s1 pmnx sb it pmnx b n pmnx b n pmnx b s1 pmnx b it pmnx eb n pmnx eb n 1 t pmnx eb s1 pmnx eb it pmnx sb n pmnx sb n pmnx sb s1 pmnx sb it pmnx m n pmnx m n pmnx m s1 pmnx m it pmnx sb n pmnx sb n t pmnx sb s1 pmnx sb it pmnx b n pmnx b n pmnx b s1 pmnx sb s1 pmnx sb it pmnx eb s1 pmnx eb it pmnx sb s1 pmnx sb it 73 74 EXPERT FONT SETS EXTENDED SETUP DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 b it lt gt ssub pmnx b it DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 eb n lt gt ssub pmnx eb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 eb sc lt gt ssub pmnx eb n DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 eb sl lt gt ssub pmnx eb s1 DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 eb it lt gt ssub pmnx eb it DeclareFontShape TS1 pmn1 bx n lt
267. uding a euro symbol that would go reasonably well with our copy of Sabon If this euro symbol is uncoded but labeled correctly we could simply add the text font to the input file list of the respective installfont commands as shown in section Iv 3 and then proceed as outlined in section 1v 1 What if it is encoded as the currency symbol in the external text font In this case we take an approach that is based on section Iv 2 with some minor adjustments Let s assume we have a copy of Bitstream Classical Garamond Since Classical Garamond is Bitstream s take on Sabon the euro symbol of this typeface will obviously go quite well with our install of Sabon The syntax of the installfont commands will look like this installfont psbr8c psbr8r unsetcur bsbr8r reseteur psbr8r textcomp ts1 TS1 bsb m n EURO SYMBOL TAKEN FROM EXTERNAL TEXT FONT 53 psb is Adobe Sabon bsb is Bitstream Classical Garamond and reseteur mtx has been discussed in section rv 2 In this case we need an additional metric file called unsetcur mtx here that clears the currency slot before bsbr8r afm is read Without this additional step the euro symbol found in the currency slot of bsbr8r afm would be discarded as psbr8r afm has already provided this symbol reseteur mtx would then move the currency symbol found in psbr8r afm to the euro slot which is obviously not what we want We need to clear the currency slot using unsetcur mtx which is quite simpl
268. ule in separation from the devel opment of ConTpXt itself The time has now come to work on a better integration I hope this can be achieved over the next year If good customizable XSL stylesheets for Docbook exist and if ConTpxXt could be an FO processor for the resulting output then why would it be a good idea to spend so much effort on writing a special Docbook stylesheet for ConTEXt In the ConTEXt community the idea of a special Docbook stylesheet for ConTgXt has been greeted with enthousiasm Apparently here the theory of one stylesheet for many processors succumbs to the practice that users prefer to work with their tools of choice For a popular set of tools like Docbook and ConTpxt users afford the effort of another style sheet Such a style sheet is more manageable for them and running the required tools is easier On the other hand until now J have spent most of the required effort And my answer tends to be Maybe it is not the best way to support Docbook and XML in ConTpxt Maybe it would be more useful to work on FO mappings in ConTpxt Over the past year I have set up this stylesheet I have investigated the main struc ture of Docbook and come up with a way to map that to a ConTEXt document I have implemented a framework for the mapping I have enjoyed doing all that and my in sight and skills in TEX macro programming have increased immensely But the time has come that others take this over add mappings for more elements a
269. umns Building the tables General setups for the tables The row height and the alignment of text within the cells are identical for all cells These dimensions are defined outside the bTABLE eTABLE environment setupTABLE row even align middle lohi height 6ex setupTABLE row odd align middle lohi height 6ex 53 applications The table for upper case letters A B C D E H K L M X bTABLE setupTABLE c 1 2 3 6 7 8 width 3em setupTABLE c 4 5 width 1 5em bTR bTD A eTD bTD B eTD bTD C eTD bTD nc 2 D eTD E eTD F eTD bTD bTD bTD bTR bTD bTD bTD 54 G eTD eTR H eTD I eTD K eTD bTD nc 2 L eTD bTD M eTD bTD N eTD Willi Egger bTD O eTD eTR bTR bTD P eTD bTD Q eTD bTD R eTD bTD nc 2 S eTD bTD T eTD bTD V eTD bTD W eTD eTR bTR bTD X eTD bTD Y eTD bTD Z eTD bTD J eTD bTD U eTD bTD char132 eTD bTD eTD bTD char146 eTD eTR eTABLE MAPS Drawing a type case in ConTExt The special character table E E E E fi tal ti woe bTABLE setupTABLE c even width 1 75em setupTABLE c odd width 1 75em bTR bTD E eTD bTD E eTD bTD CE eTD bTD E eTD bTD eTD bTD 1 eTD bTD fi eTD bT
270. uspension region Figure 4 shows the resulting Msc The LaTEX code for the msc of Figure 4 is begin msc Regions declinst usr User declinst ftp ftp client declinst ctan ftp tex ac uk CTAN regionstart activation ftp mess anonymous usr ftp nextlevel regionstart suspension ftp regionstart activation ctan mess anonymous ftp ctan nextlevel 2 mess Ok ctan ftp regionend ctan regionstart activation ftp nextlevel mess parbox b 85 instdist centering command successful ftp usr regionend ftp end msc Note that the space between the activation region of the ftp client and the anonymous message from the ftp client to CTAN is very small In the next paragraph we will show Najaar 2003 application msc Regions User ftp client ftp tex ac uk anonymous command successful Figure 4 An MSC with activation and suspension regions how redefining one of the Msc parameters can increase this space MSC parameters The msc macro package has almost 30 parameters to change the layout of Mscs For example the width of instances the distance between instances the distance between the head symbols and the msc frame and the width and height of action symbols can all be changed These parameters are represented by the LaT X lengths instwidth instdist topheaddist actionwidth actionheight respectively For instance in the MSC of Figure 4 the distance between the i
271. usually maintained by package man INSTALLING THE FILES 15 agement software The local tree is for everything that is not part of the Tetex distribution but should be available system wide The user tree is for private files of individual users on the system Fonts and everything related to them should go in the local tree if you have administrative access on the system Putting them in the global tree is a bad idea because they might get overwritten when you update Tetex putting them in a private one will restrict access to them to a single user which is probably not what you want if you have administrative access It is a good idea to define the variable TEXMF all trees in a way that references TEXMFLOCAL the local tree before TEXMFMAIN the global tree This will allow you to install newer ver sions of selected packages in the local tree without updating the whole install I recommend defining TEXMF as follows in texmf cnf TEXMF HOMETEXMF TEXMFLOCAL TEXMFMAIN This will give you two levels on top of the global install your local extensions will be preferred over files in the global tree and can in turn be overridden by individual users who put files in their private tree HOMETEXMF These set tings should go into the global configuration file for the kpathsea search library texmf cfg For the rest of this section we will assume that we are installing the fonts in the local tree and that its top directory is us
272. ut S S S S S s1 S S S S S As far as Latex is file though fd 1 mjn1 mjn1 m n lt gt mjn1 m sc lt gt mjn1 m s1 lt gt mjn1 m it lt gt mjn1 b n lt gt 1 mjn1 b sc lt gt mjn1 b s1 lt gt mjn1 b it lt gt mjn1 bx n lt gt mjn1 bx sc lt gt mjn1 bx s1 lt gt mjn1 bx it lt gt concerned our ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub ssub jnx m n jnx m n jnx m s1 jnx m i jnx b n jnx b n jnx b s1 jnx b i jnx b n jnx b n jnx b s1 jnx b i 0 63 setup is complete now We still need a map v 4 The map file The syntax of map files has been basic font set should therefore be obvious mjnr8r JansonMT mjnri8r JansonMT Ital mjnb8r JansonMT Bold mjnbi8r JansonMT Bold mjnro8r JansonMT Mapping lines for expert fonts are simpler because there discussed in detail before The lines for the TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont ic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont Italic TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont mjnbo8r JansonMT Bold 0 167 SlantFont TeXBaselEncoding ReEncodeFont coding and no encoding vector will be
273. ve fonts ps typel ec 2 http www ctan org tex archive fonts ps type1l cm super NN UR WN Ee 24 THE BASICS leased to the public the promising Latin Modern fonts created by Bogustaw Jackowski and Janusz M Nowacki Unlike Tt2001 and cm super Latin Modern is derived from the original Computer Modern designs and augmented with accented letters as well as other glyphs missing from the very restricted glyph base of the original fonts While the Latin Modern fonts are younger than Eu ropean Computer Modern they are a parallel development from a systematic perspective Consequently they are not affected by the controversial design de cisions underlying certain parts of the European Computer Modern family of fonts They use a font specific encoding by default and feature a glyph base suit able for T1 Ts1 Ly1 as well as the Polish encoding qx1 Even though these fonts are still under development they are already perfectly usable as of this writing Here is yet another iteration of our style file for Sabon combined with Latin Modern for the sans serif and typewriter families NeedsTeXFormat LaTeX2e ProvidesPackage sabon 2003 07 27 v1 0 Adobe Sabon with LM RequirePackage T1 fontenc RequirePackage textcomp RequirePackage modern renewcommand rmdefault psb endinput Apart from these free fonts there are also commercial offerings from Y amp Y and Micropress Judging by the vendors websites Micropress offers Posts
274. werpen passen immers in die jas We waren voor de derde maal te gast in het Arnhemse Hotel Haarhuis Na de koffie in de bekende wandelgangen van het hotel begonnen we de dag met een ledenvergadering Van het bestuur zaten voorzitter Hans Hagen en secretaris Willi Egger aan de tafel voorin de zaal Eerst dreigde de hele agenda notulen mededelingen ingekomen stukken in vijf minuten gedaan te zijn inclusief vrolijke mededelingen over de maps komt eraan en 4TEX conflict opgelost Wietse Dol vriendelijk akkoord Erik laat zijn aandeel in de opbrengst aan de NTG applaus Maar gelukkig kwam het onderwerp OSOSS ter sprake een ingewikkelde kwestie waar slechts enkele experts het woord over kunnen voeren Dat deden deze deskundigen dan ook en wel zodanig dat de geplande vergadertijd ruim werd gevuld Piet van Oostrum opende de reeks voordrachten met een volledige verhandeling over bibTEX een onderdeel van IEX waarmee bibliografie n zijn te maken bij opstellen artikelen en boeken Piet had de voorafgaande nacht tot twee uur doorgewerkt aan zijn presentatie en zoals we van hem gewend zijn leverde hij een perfect verhaal Naast de technische aspecten was het ook interessant om te horen hoe merkwaardig men in de ons omringende landen denkt over alfabetisch sorteren Bij het op de gewenste volgorde krijgen van een lijst van auteursnamen leidt dit tot allerlei verrassende ingrepen Desi MAPS NTG bijeenkomst Intussen was gasttekenares Dily
275. will switch to the shape designated by the third argument instead pro vided that it is available for the current font family With this macro at hand we redefine itshape 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 EXTENDING THE USER INTERFACE 77 DeclareRobustCommand itshape not math alphabet itshape mathit exfs merge shape itdefault scdefault sidefault Essentially itshape will switch to the font shape it unless the current shape is sc in which case it will switch to si instead provided that si is available scshape does it the other way around DeclareRobustCommand scshape not math alphabet scshape relax exfs merge shape scdefault itdefault sidefault We also redefine upshape to make it switch to sc instead of n if the current shape is si DeclareRobustCommand upshape not math al phabet upshape rel ax exfs merge shape updefault sidefault scdefault If no italic small caps are available all of these macros will behave like they did before making them suitable for global use While we are at it we also define a new macro dfshape that will reset the current shape to the default n unless shapedefault has been redefined regardless of the current shape DeclareRobustCommand dfshape not math al phabet dfshape rel ax fontshape shapedefault selectfont Before we add text commands for our new font switches there is
276. with ornaments which are included in some of the alternate text fonts so we use a complete declaration for maximum flexibility Internally the or naments are saved in a format modeled after the way the Nrss handles font shapes When typesetting an ornament later we need a macro to parse this font declaration begingroup catcode 12 gdef exfs split orndef 1 2 3 4 5 ni1 def f encoding 1 def f family 2 def f series 3 def f shape 4 def exfs tempa 5 endgroup Since we use the base of the font family name as an identifier we also need a macro that expands to the first three letters of the current font family def exfs base fami ly expandafter exfs get base f family nil 101 VO 0 NAUWE WN 10 11 12 13 14 THE STYLE FILE 79 Now we can finally implement a user macro that actually typesets the orna ment We will simply call it ornament DeclareRobustCommand ornament 1 expandafter i fx csname exfs base fami ly Gorn roman 1 endcsname relax PackageWarning nfssext Ornament 1 undefined for font family exfs base family MessageBreak Setting debug mark rule lex lex else begingroup edef exfs tempb csname exfs base family orn roman 1 endcsname expandafter expandafter expandafter exfs spl it orndef expandafter string exfs tempb ni 1 selectfont char exfs tempa endgroup fi endinput First of all we check if the desired ornament has been declared 93
277. x and 8r enc This is merely intended as an illustrating of how to deal with a typical encoding problem If you simply want to get access to an uncoded euro glyph upgrade to fontinst 1 9 update 8r enc and install the fonts as usual You might want to skip the next paragraphs and continue read ing with section rv 2 on page 46 in this case If you want to learn more about fontinst s encoding vectors read on First we create a copy of the file 8r etx as provided by fontinst 1 8 The updated encoding vector of the new fontinst release puts the euro symbol in slot 128 We will do the same to ensure that our vector remains compatible with the official distribution Let s take a look at the relevant part of 8r etx setslot asciitilde comment The ASCII tilde textasciitilde This is included for compatibility with typewriter fonts used for computer listings endsetslot comment The following 32 slots 128 159 are based on Windows ANSI nextslot 130 setslot quotesingl base comment A German single quote mark quotesinglbase similar to a comma but with different sidebearings endsetslot Slot 126 defines asciitilde slots 127 129 are empty and slot 130 defines the lower single quotation mark quotesinglbase The slot number is automatically incremented by one for each setslot command but if some slots are left 1 http www ctan org tex archive fonts utilities fontinst 2 http www ctan org tex archiv
278. y adding resetosf mtx installfont psbri8c psbrij8r resetosf textcomp ts1 TS1 psb m it instal font psbb8c psbbj8r resetosf textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b n instal font psbbo8c psbboj8r resetosf textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b sl install font psbbi8c psbbij8r resetosf textcomp ts1 TS1 psb b it endinstallfonts This is the first half of our fontinst file which is dealing with the psb family Compared to the template introduced in the previous tutorial it adds optical small caps to T1 and hanging figures to Ts1 encoding We will create an addi tional font family called psbj which we want to use hanging figures through out instal fonts installfamily T1 psbj install font psbrj8t psbr8r unsetnum kernoff psbrc8r kernon latin t1 T1 psbj m n If we want the psbj family to incorporate hanging figures we need to exchange the figure set of the virtual font like we did when creating the regular weight small caps font above But this time we do it the other way around we read psbr8r first clear the encoding slots of all figures and add psbrc8r afterwards to fill the figure slots using the hanging figures found in psbrc8r Only the figures found in psbrc8r will be included in the virtual font as all other en coding slots were already filled by psbr8r Again care needs to be taken with the kerning data here The kerning information in psbrc8r refers to small caps although the
279. y vertical lines Interaction between instances is denoted by labeled arrows For instance the arrow ftp tex ac uk is a message from User to ftp client Sending and receiving of a message are special types of events each message has a send event and a receive event Later we will see other types of events Events occur on instance lines Events are ordered in time and for each instance time is supposed to run from top to bottom Furthermore the send event of a message never 38 msc ftp login to CTAN archive User ftp client ftp tex ac uk ftp tex ac uk connect login anonymous anonymous command successful Figure 1 An ftp login to the CTAN at ftp tex ac uk occurs after the receive event of the message For example from Figure 1 we can derive that the ftp tex ac uk message occurs before the connect message because the receive event of the first message occurs before the send event of the second message In order to include mscs in LalEX documents we have developed the msc macro package The current version of the Msc macro package supports almost the full MSC language as defined in the standard In this article we will describe the motivation of the Msc macro package the features of the msc macro package the design of the MSC macro package and the limitations of the Msc macro package This paper does not describe all features of the MSC macro package For a thorough treatment of the MSC macro package we refer to
280. y with all those bloosming trees lilacs and you name it Money machines in the streets are common and convenient There is less police than 10 years ago on the roads near for us foreigners difficult to recognize village built up areas to check your speed The next BachoTgX will be special on the 1 of May Poland will officially join the EEC Moreover Poland traditionally celebrates its proclamation on the 3 of May 1791 of the first modern constitution of all Europe And for me personally it will be 10 years ago that I visited BachoTpx for the first time and 11002 years ago that I visited for the first time Hanna Janusz Bien W odek Jacko and GUST avant la lettre 4 Peter is the children s hero his rockets captivated Maarten among others and with the bonfire Maarten was Peter s best assistent 5 I love the Polski grip the Polish mushrooms 6 The slogan on this year s T shirt 7 Jacko s second paper is not in there because the editors considered the documentation which comes along with the macros sufficient I tend not to submit any longer I freed myself from restrictions deadlines and I put the material on my WWW site when I m done with it like this report Editors can include the links after verification in their column There are disadvantages to publishing on the WWW I know but I consider the freedom as an extra for the time being and the way of doing in general for the future and my TEX amp Co future sta
281. y13lb ups withpen pencircle scaled 1 5bp data plot autogrid always an autogrid here empty setcoords linear linear hidden effect resets scaling setrange 210 500 230 1500 note a different vertical scale gdraw inl3lb ups withpen pencircle scaled 7bp data plot autogrid otick bot grid rt draw horizontal amp vertical scales endgraph stopreusableMPgraphic And this is how two of them are used in a CONTEXT combination placefigure middle fig outlierb013 Both left panels startcombination 1 2 reuseMPgraphic outlier1 reuseMPgraphic outlier2 stopcombination Postscript A true hacker would have thought of a solution in less time than it cost me The manual that comes with Hobby s Graph package is written for experts not for the common user Graph s output is so accurate and scalable that one wants to use it anyway but experi mentation is time consuming and when one must finish a production on time and within budget the level of experimentation required is bedeviling The solution for that is to post a question with the CONTEXT user group Najaar 2003 metapost 51 metapost 52 Karel H Wesseling Dn m 120 80 115 60 115 60 110 40 110 40 105 20 105 20 10 rr 0 mo o 140 145 150 155 160 140 145 150 155 160 time s time s ibi ms ibi ms 1400 1400 hoo
282. ymbol and Upper LowerText DL se E 0 F F T T C Xn Xi N DL DL R DL R DU R DL DU R DU DL DL R RV Symbol explosive pdf oxide pdf flammab pdf flammab pdf toxic pdf toxic pdf corrosive pdf harmful pdf harmful pdf environ pdf none template pdf English text explosive oxidising highly flammable extremely flammable toxic very toxic corrosive harmful irritant dangerous for the environment newcommand UpperSymbol flammab newcommand UpperText licht ontvlambaar newcommand LowerSymbol harmful newcommand LowerText schadelijk Dutch text ontplofbaar oxiderend licht ontvlambaar zeer licht ontvlambaar vergiftig zeer vergiftig bijtend schadelijk irriterend milieugevaarlijk The next four lines select the two symbols that can go on the sticker and the accompanying texts If you want to leave a symbol empty use template pdf Vervolgens worden de R en S zinnen opgenomen Deze zijn gezet als description elementen Het zou mooi zijn om een macro te defini ren die automatisch de juiste zin genereert op basis van het nummer bijvoorbeeld R 20 21 22 Maar dat is mij op dit moment TEXnologisch te hoog gegrepen 46 MAPS Labels voor gevaarlijke stoffen met LaTEX 42 Next are the R amp S sentences You should be able to find them 43 on the MSDS for the substance They are set as 44 _description_ items 45 46 newcommand RSsentences 47 item R11 Licht ontvlambaar
283. zpeub pfb zpeuros EuroSans Regular 0 167 SlantFont lt zpeurs pfb zpeubos EuroSans Bold 0 167 SlantFont lt zpeubs pfb zpeurot EuroMono Regular 0 167 SlantFont lt zpeurt pfb zpeubot EuroMono Bold 0 167 SlantFont lt zpeubt pfb While we are at it let s also write some font definition files for Latex These are not required if the fonts are only referenced by other virtual fonts but they will allow us the access the Euro fonts directly in any Latex file The syntax of the commands used in font definition files is explained in the Latex font selection guide mentioned in the introduction Our font definition file for Euro Serif upeu fd should look like this ProvidesFile upeu fd DeclareFontFamily U peu DeclareFontShape U peu m n lt gt zpeur DeclareFontShape U peu m sc lt gt ssub peu m n DeclareFontShape U peu m s1 lt gt zpeuro DeclareFontShape U peu m it lt gt zpeuri DeclareFontShape U peu b n lt gt zpeub DeclareFontShape U peu b sc lt gt ssub peu b n DeclareFontShape U peu b sl lt gt zpeubo DeclareFontShape U peu b it lt gt zpeubi EURO SYMBOL TAKEN FROM EXTERNAL SYMBOL FONT 51 DeclareFontShape U peu bx n lt gt ssub peu b n DeclareFontShape U peu bx sc lt gt ssub peu b n DeclareFontShape U peu bx s1 lt gt ssub peu b s1 DeclareFontShape

NUMMER 29 • NAJAAR 2003

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

NUMMER 29 &bull; NAJAAR 2003

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

NUMMER 29 • NAJAAR 2003